Xerox All in One Printer Pro 385 User Manual
Pro 385 User Manual  
Pro 385 User Manual  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Getting Started  
Chapter 2 Making a Copy  
Chapter 3 Sending a Fax  
Chapter 4 Receiving a Fax  
Chapter 5 Printing  
Chapter 6 Scanning  
Chapter 7 Trouble Shooting  
Chapter 8 Maintenance  
Chapter 9 Appendix  
Chapter 10 Glossary  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/wc385toc.htm [07/09/1999 14:30:40]  
Installing the Machine  
Reports 1-46  
Printing Reports 1-46  
User Options (System Data) 1-47  
Setting an Option 1-47  
Selectable Options 1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter1/chpt1.htm (2 of 2) [07/09/1999 14:30:53]  
Chapter 1  
1
Getting Started  
Set Up Your Machine  
Unpacking  
Laser Printer  
cartridge  
User Guide  
One-touch label  
WorkCentre 385  
Document Exit tray  
CD-ROM  
Document Input tray  
Printer exit tray  
Telephone line cord*  
Power cord*  
Parallel cable  
* Appearance may vary according to country.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Control Locations and Functions  
Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the main components and their  
locations.  
Automatic Paper Feeder  
Extension Tray  
Front View  
Automatic  
Paper  
Feeder  
Paper Guides  
Manual  
Paper  
Feeder  
Document  
Input  
Tray  
Automatic  
Document  
Feeder  
Control  
Panel  
Document  
Guides  
Document  
Exit Tray  
Paper Exit Tray  
Note: Your machine may look slightly different than the illustration.  
1-2  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear View  
1
TEL LINE  
Jack  
Power Cord Connector  
PC Cable Connector  
EXT. LINE Jack  
Inside  
Laser  
Printer  
Cartridge  
Cover  
Cover  
Release  
Buttons  
(right and  
left sides)  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing a Location  
To help guarantee trouble-free operation of your machine, place it on a flat,  
stable surface near your workstation. Leave enough space to allow for easy  
paper loading, paper unloading, and opening of the front cover.  
Do not place your machine:  
In direct sunlight.  
Near heat sources or air conditioners.  
In dusty or dirty environments.  
Setting Up Your Machine  
Document Input Tray  
Insert the two tabs on the tray into the slots as shown. Fold out the extender  
on the tray, if necessary.  
1-4  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Exit Tray  
While pushing inward on the flexible side tabs of the printer exit tray, insert  
them into the corresponding slots. If desired, fold out the extension tray.  
1
Extension tray  
Side tab  
Document Exit Tray  
Insert the two tabs on the document exit tray into the slots on the front of  
your machine. Fold out the extension tray, if necessary.  
Extension tray  
Side tab  
Insert one side tab. Then, while pushing inward on the remaining tab, slide it into place.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
1 Open the cover by pulling the cover release buttons on both sides of the  
machine toward you.  
Cover Release  
Button  
2 Unwrap the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
3 Shake the Laser Printer Cartridge from side to side five or six times to  
distribute the toner evenly.  
1-6  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Carefully remove the sealing tape by pulling straight out on the tab  
protruding from the end of the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
1
5 Locate the two Laser Printer Cartridge slots inside the printer, one on  
each side.  
cartridge slot  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Grasp the handle and slide the Laser Printer Cartridge down along the  
cartridge slots until it clicks into place.  
7 Close the cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed and both  
cover release buttons have clicked into place.  
1-8  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone Line  
Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the TEL LINE jack and the  
other end into a standard phone wall jack.  
1
To a  
standard  
phone wall  
jack  
Extension Phone  
If you want to use an ordinary phone or answering machine with your  
WorkCentre 385, connect it to the jack labelled EXT. LINE on the back of  
the machine.  
To a  
regular  
phone or  
answering  
machine  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PC Cable  
Your Xerox WorkCentre 385 is equipped with a parallel interface port for  
use with IBM PCs and compatible computers. Using the supplied  
Centronics parallel cable, connect your WorkCentre 385 to a computer that  
supports bi-directional communications (IEEE standard 1284).  
Note: If using another parallel cable, ensure that it meets IEEE standard  
1284 specifications.  
To connect the WorkCentre 385 to a computer, follow the steps  
below:  
CAUTION: Make sure the computer is turned off, and the WorkCentre 385  
is unplugged from the power outlet.  
1 Plug the parallel cable into the connector on the back of the  
WorkCentre 385. Swing the metal clips of the connector inward until  
they lock firmly inside the notches on the parallel cable connector.  
1-10  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Connector  
Clips  
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the parallel port on your computer.  
If necessary, refer to your computer documentation for assistance with  
this procedure.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC Power Cord  
WARNING: There is NO On/Off switch for the WC 385. When the AC  
power cord is plugged in, the machine is fully energized.  
Note: To correctly install the WC 385, the AC power cord must remain  
unplugged from the grounded wall outlet until software is to be loaded. In  
the next step, one end of the power cord will be plugged into the back of the  
WC 385. Leave the other end of the cord unplugged until directed to plug it  
in during software installation.  
1 Plug one end of the AC Power Cord in the back of the WC 385.  
1-12  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Print Media Specifications  
Refer to the Appendix for detailed print media specifications.  
1
There are two locations to load paper, the Automatic Paper Feeder and the  
Manual Paper Feeder. The table below illustrates the paper types that can  
be loaded into each:  
Automatic Paper Feeder  
Manual Paper Feeder  
Standard Paper  
Transparency Film  
Paper Label  
Non-Standard Paper  
Transparency Film  
Paper Label  
Envelopes  
Card Stock  
Odd Size (minimum 10.5 cm x 15 cm)  
In the table below, the capacities for the various media in the Automatic  
Paper Feeder and the Manual Paper Feeder are shown:  
Automatic Paper  
Feeder Capacity  
Manual Paper  
Feeder Capacity  
Type  
150 (20# 80 gm2Stock)  
Paper  
1
Transparency Film  
Paper Label  
Card Stock  
1
1
1
1
1
1
N/A  
N/A  
Envelope  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In the following table, the capacity of the Automatic Paper Feeder is shown:  
Paper Type  
Letter/A4  
Legal  
Capacity  
100 Sheets (20# 80 gm2 paper)  
50 Sheets (20# 80 gm2 paper)  
1
All Other Stock (Label Paper,  
Transparency, Envelope)  
Core Media List  
The following list reflects the media that has been tested and is guaranteed  
to successfully print.  
Paper  
Size  
Weight  
16#  
Xerox 4200  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
20# 80 gm2  
80 gm2  
Xerox 4024DP Bond  
Xerox 80 Premier  
210 X 297 mm  
20# 80 gm2  
Xerox Blue, Green and  
Red  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
Xerox 3R9023  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
N/A  
Transparency Film  
1-14  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the following table, the capacity of the Automatic Paper Feeder is shown:  
Paper Type  
Letter/A4  
Legal  
Capacity  
100 Sheets (20# 80 gm2 paper)  
50 Sheets (20# 80 gm2 paper)  
1
All Other Stock (Label Paper,  
Transparency, Envelope)  
Core Media List  
The following list reflects the media that has been tested and is guaranteed  
to successfully print.  
Paper  
Size  
Weight  
16#  
Xerox 4200  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
20# 80 gm2  
80 gm2  
Xerox 4024DP Bond  
Xerox 80 Premier  
210 X 297 mm  
20# 80 gm2  
Xerox Blue, Green and  
Red  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
Xerox 3R9023  
Letter (8 1/2 x11)  
N/A  
Transparency Film  
1-14  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Paper  
For best results, use high quality xerographic copy paper as described in  
Print Media Specifications on page 1-13.  
1
Using the Automatic Paper Feeder  
You can stack paper, envelopes, card stocks, labels, or transparencies in the  
Automatic Paper Feeder to feed automatically. The Automatic Paper  
2
Feeder can hold a maximum of 150 sheets of 80 gm plain paper, or 10  
envelopes, or other print media. Depending upon media thickness,  
maximum capacity may be reduced.  
Note: If you experience problems feeding paper, place the media into the  
Manual Paper Feeder one sheet at a time.  
1 Pull the Extension Tray on the Automatic Paper Feeder all the way up.  
Automatic Paper  
Feeder  
Extension  
Tray  
Manual Paper  
Feeder  
2 Prepare the print material for loading.  
For paper and envelopes, flex paper or fan envelopes back and forth.  
Do not fold or crease the paper.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Note: If envelopes jam while printing, try reducing the number of  
envelopes in the Automatic Paper Feeder.  
For transparencies, refer to the packaging for the transparency stock to  
determine the print side. Hold the transparencies by the edges and  
avoid touching the print side. Be careful not to scratch or leave  
fingerprints on the print side.  
Fan the stack of transparencies to prevent feeding failures.  
1-16  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Load the print material in the Automatic Paper Feeder. Do not exceed  
the rated capacity for each type of print material. For media capacity  
specifications, refer to Print Media Specifications on page 1-13 and  
Specifications in the Appendix. Do not mix different types of print  
media. Refer to the following instructions for loading each type of print  
material.  
1
a) Load paper or transparencies with the print side facing you.  
The WorkCentre  
385 will print on  
the side facing  
you.  
b) Load envelopes with the flap side facing away from you. The end  
of the envelope with the stamp area must enter the Automatic Paper  
Feeder first.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: Do not feed stamped envelopes. The stamp is shown in the previous  
illustration for reference only.  
CAUTION: Never use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated  
linings, or self-stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the  
printer.  
c) Load letterhead paper with the design facing you. The top edge of  
the sheet with the logo should enter the printer first.  
.
1-18  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Adjust the paper guides to the width of the print media. Slide the paper  
guides until they lightly touch both sides of the stack of print media.  
Do not tightly press the paper guides to the print media edges, the  
guides may bend the media or provide too much resistance when  
feeding.  
1
Note: When you print a file from your PC using the Automatic Paper  
Feeder, make sure that you select the correct paper source and paper size  
from your software application before starting your print job.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Manual Paper Feeder  
Use the Manual Paper Feeder to feed paper one sheet at a time into your  
machine.  
Manual  
Paper  
Feeder  
Note: When you print a file from your PC using the Manual Paper Feeder,  
make sure that you select the correct paper source and paper size from  
your software application before starting your print job.  
1 Place the paper in the Manual Paper Feeder and adjust the paper guides  
to the width of the print material. Slide the paper guides until they  
lightly touch the stack of print media. Do not tightly press the paper  
guides to the print media edges, the guides may bend the media or  
provide too much resistance when feeding.  
Note: Refer to Loading Paper on page 1-15 for specific instructions on  
loading various types of media.  
1-20  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Ensure that the media is fed into the machine as far as it will go.  
1
3 Press the Start button to start manual feeding of the media. If you have  
more than one page to print, press the Start button for each page.  
Set Up Your Machine  
1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Guidelines  
When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other special media, keep  
these guidelines in mind:  
Always use paper and other media that conform with those listed under  
Print Media Specifications on page 1-13 and Specifications in the  
Appendix.  
Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause  
paper jams and poor print quality.  
Use cut-sheet paper only. You cannot use continuous feed paper.  
Use only high quality, copier grade paper. Avoid paper with embossed  
lettering, perforations, or texture that is too smooth or too rough.  
Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white paper. The  
o
pigments must withstand the printer’s fusing temperature of 392 F  
o
(200 C) for 0.1 second without deterioration. Do not use paper with a  
colored coating that was added after the paper was produced.  
Pre-printed forms must be printed with non-flammable, heat-resistant  
inks that do not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when  
o
o
subjected to the printer’s approximately 392 F (200 C) fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second.  
Store paper in its ream wrapper until ready to use. Place cartons on  
pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place heavy objects on top of  
the paper, whether it is packaged or unpackaged. Keep it away from  
moisture, or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl.  
During storage, moisture-proof wrap (any plastic container or bag)  
should be used to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating your  
paper.  
1-22  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use only transparencies designed for use with xerographic printers.  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp, well creased folds.  
DO NOT use envelopes with clasps and snaps.  
1
DO NOT use envelopes with windows, coated linings, self-stick  
adhesives, or other synthetic materials.  
DO NOT use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Paper Guidelines  
1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing Software  
System Requirements  
Proper operation of the WorkCentre 385 requires that your personal  
computer meets or exceeds the following system requirements:  
IBM compatible personal computer, with a 486SX 33MHz or faster  
processor  
Windows operating environment (3.1x, Windows 95, Windows 98,  
Windows NT 4.0)  
At least 4MB of free hard disk space*  
8MB or more RAM (Windows 3.1x), 16MB RAM (Windows 95, 98),  
and 24MB RAM (NT 4.0)  
* 4MB minimum hard disk space required for driver installation only. If  
installing the additional software packages included on the CD ROM,  
an additional 30MB free hard disk space is required (20MB TextBridge  
Pro, 10MB LaserFax3.5 Lite).  
Overview of the WorkCentre 385 Drivers  
Before the WorkCentre 385 can interface with your computer, you must  
install driver files. These drivers will enable your computer to properly  
communicate with the WorkCentre 385 for printing, scanning and PC fax  
operations. PC fax is the process of faxing a computer file, such as a word  
processing document or image file, directly from your computer via the  
built-in fax modem in the WorkCentre 385.  
All of the necessary drivers are contained on the CD included with your  
WorkCentre 385.  
1-24  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Software  
Two software applications, LaserFAX 3.5 Lite and Textbridge Pro, are  
included on the CD ROM supplied with the WorkCentre 385.  
1
LaserFAX 3.5 Lite is a fax program which enables you to send faxes  
from and receive faxes to your PC.  
TextBridge Pro, a scanning program with optical character recognition  
(OCR) capabilities, is also included for your convenience.  
Proper operation of the WorkCentre 385 with either of the additional  
software applications requires prior installation of the WorkCentre 385  
drivers.  
Installing Software  
1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software Installation Procedure  
In Windows 3.x, Windows 95/98, or Windows NT 4.0  
1 Turn on your PC and start Windows.  
2 Ensure the Xerox WorkCentre 385 is plugged into a standard grounded  
AC power outlet and connected to your computer.  
To AC outlet  
3 The machine turns on.  
Note: To power off the machine; unplug the power cord. Power must be  
applied at all times if the machine is used as an unattended fax machine.  
4 Insert the supplied CD into your computer’s CD ROM drive.  
The Xerox WorkCentre 385 installation program will begin.  
1-26  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If you are using Windows 3.x, the Xerox WorkCentre 385 installation  
program will not begin automatically. To start the program, Select  
FILE>RUN from the Windows Program Manager then proceed to step  
4b.  
1
If the program does not start:  
a) From the Start menu, select Run.  
b) Type D:\autorun.exe (where "D" represents the letter designation of  
the computer’s CD ROM drive), and click OK to start the  
installation program.  
The Xerox WorkCentre 385 installation program will begin.  
Installing Software  
1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Select a language.  
A window will appear showing the components to be installed.  
1-28  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Follow the on-screen instructions and click Continue.  
1
The selected components are installed one at a time in the order they are  
presented on the screen.  
Note: Although the installation program will prompt you to shut down your  
machine after each component is installed, it is not necessary to shut down  
your computer until all components are installed.  
After the last component has been installed, you must shut down and restart  
your computer to complete the installation process. If your computer does  
not shut down and restart automatically, you must shut it down manually  
and restart it before the changes you have made will be in effect.  
Installing Software  
1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: After installing the printer driver, the WorkCentre 385 will be selected  
as the default Windows printer.  
Uninstalling Software  
Uninstallation of software is required only if you are upgrading the  
software, or if your installation fails.  
In Windows 3.x  
In Windows 3.x, all WorkCentre 385 software components are installed into  
a single Program Group.  
To uninstall components:  
1 Start Windows.  
2 In the Program Manager, double click the WorkCentre 385 Program  
Group.  
The WorkCentre 385 Program Group will open.  
3 Double Click on the Program Group containing the component you  
wish to uninstall.  
The Program Group will open.  
4 Double Click on the Uninstall icon.  
The selected component is uninstalled.  
Note: All software components must be uninstalled one at a time.  
1-30  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Windows 95/98, or Windows NT 4.0  
1 Start Windows.  
1
2 From the Start menu, select Programs.  
3 Select the Start Menu Program Item for component you wish to  
uninstall.  
4 Click on the Submenu uninstall icon for the component you wish to  
remove.  
A window will appear prompting you to confirm that you wish to  
remove the selected application.  
5 Click on Yes.  
6 Uninstall Shield launches and the component is uninstalled.  
Note: All software components must be uninstalled one at a time.  
Uninstalling Software  
1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Control Panel  
LCD Display  
On/Off Line  
The display shows the current  
status of your machine, and guides  
you through various tasks using a  
menu system for each operation.  
Button and  
LED Indicator  
Use to turn  
your machine  
On-line or Off-  
line. The LED  
lights while the  
machine is on-  
line, indicating  
that the  
machine is  
ready to print a  
PC file.  
Print Priority  
Use to assign  
print priority to  
PC file printing  
over fax  
printing.  
One-touch Dial  
and  
Menu  
Special  
Use to choose special functions.  
Function  
Buttons  
Up and Down  
Use to display the next or previous menu  
item. Also use to adjust machine settings.  
Use to call most  
frequently used  
numbers with  
one button.  
Also, use in  
conjunction with  
the Menu button  
to set up special  
functions or print  
reports.  
Right and Left  
Use to move cursor left or right across the  
display.  
Stop  
Use to stop an operation at any time.  
Copy  
Use to copy a document.  
Start/Enter  
Use to start a job. Also use to activate the  
selection shown in the display.  
1-32  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Search/Delete  
Use to search for  
numbers in  
1
memory. Also use  
to delete digits in  
the edit mode.  
Receive  
(Receive Mode)  
Use to choose the  
receive mode you  
want to use. The  
selected mode is  
displayed.  
Resolution  
Use to choose the  
resolution of  
copied or  
transmitted  
documents.  
Contrast  
Use to choose the  
contrast of copied  
or transmitted  
documents.  
Number Keypad  
Use to dial  
numbers  
manually or to  
enter letters and  
numbers for  
various  
programming  
functions.  
Speed/Dual  
Use to dial calls and send fax documents by  
entering a 2-digit number. Also use to switch  
the LCD display between tasks while  
performing dual jobs.  
Redial/Pause  
Use to redial the last phone number called.  
You can also use it to add a pause when  
storing a number in memory.  
Flash  
Use to perform a switch-hook operation such  
as call waiting.  
Speaker  
Use to adjust the volume of the internal  
speaker.  
Using the Control Panel  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Setup  
Ringer Volume  
You can adjust the volume of the ringer to the desired loudness.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press Enter, then press the Up or Down button to choose the desired  
loudness of the ringer.  
The selected ringer sounds and the display indicates the loudness level  
with the > symbol.  
If adjusted such that no > symbol is displayed, the ringer will be turned  
off. The machine will work normally even if the ringer is set to off.  
RINGER VOLUME  
[>>>>>>>> ]  
3 Press Enter when the desired volume level is selected. The display  
indicates the next setup menu DEFAULT SETTINGS ?. For details on  
the Default Settings menu, see Home Resolution and Home Contrast on  
page 1-35.  
4 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
1-34  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Home Resolution and Home Contrast  
The default print resolution and contrast can be set to their most frequently  
used modes. Whenever a document is sent or copied, the home contrast and  
resolution mode will be activated unless otherwise changed by using the  
Resolution or Contrast button on the control panel.  
1
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until DEFAULT SETTINGS ? appears.  
3 Press Enter. The display prompts you to choose the Home Resolution  
mode.  
HOME RESOLUTION  
[ STANDARD ]  
4 Press the Left or Right button repeatedly until you locate the desired  
mode:  
STANDARD–use with most documents.  
FINE–use for documents with fine detail, such as small print.  
SUPER FINE–use for documents that have extremely fine detail.  
5 Press Enter to select the desired resolution mode. The display prompts  
you to choose the Home Contrast mode  
.
HOME CONTRAST  
[ NORMAL ]  
System Setup  
1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 Press the Left or Right button repeatedly until you find the desired  
mode:  
NORMAL–use with documents of average or normal contrast.  
DARKEN–use with documents with low contrast or light images.  
LIGHTEN–use with documents with high contrast or dark images.  
PHOTO–for obtaining maximum image quality with documents  
that contain pictures or photographs with shades of gray.  
7 Press Enter to select the desired mode. The SOUND CONTROL ?  
setup menu selection is displayed. Refer to the next section Sound  
Control, for configuration details.  
8 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Sound Control  
You can choose an alarm tone to sound when abnormal operating conditions  
occur; for example, when out of paper, or if a cover is open. You can also  
set the machine to beep when any key is pressed.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find SOUND CONTROL ?.  
3 Press Enter. The display prompts you to turn the alarm sound ON or  
OFF.  
4 Press 1 to turn the sound ON or 2 to turn it OFF. You can also press the  
Right or Left button to choose ON or OFF, then press Enter to  
confirm.  
1-36  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Press the Left or Right button repeatedly until you find the desired  
mode:  
NORMAL–use with documents of average or normal contrast.  
DARKEN–use with documents with low contrast or light images.  
LIGHTEN–use with documents with high contrast or dark images.  
PHOTO–for obtaining maximum image quality with documents  
that contain pictures or photographs with shades of gray.  
7 Press Enter to select the desired mode. The SOUND CONTROL ?  
setup menu selection is displayed. Refer to the next section Sound  
Control, for configuration details.  
8 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Sound Control  
You can choose an alarm tone to sound when abnormal operating conditions  
occur; for example, when out of paper, or if a cover is open. You can also  
set the machine to beep when any key is pressed.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find SOUND CONTROL ?.  
3 Press Enter. The display prompts you to turn the alarm sound ON or  
OFF.  
4 Press 1 to turn the sound ON or 2 to turn it OFF. You can also press the  
Right or Left button to choose ON or OFF, then press Enter to  
confirm.  
1-36  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 The display prompts you to turn the key sound ON or OFF.  
Press 1 to turn the sound ON or 2 to turn it OFF. The REMOTE  
DIAGNOSIS PROTECTION ? setup menu selection is displayed.  
Refer to the next section, Remote Diagnosis Protection for  
configuration details.  
1
6 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Remote Diagnosis Protection  
Remote diagnosis is a feature which allows Xerox or other authorized  
personnel to perform diagnostics on your machine via telephone.  
If you want to disable remote diagnosis (to protect your machine from being  
serviced by an unauthorized person), you must activate the Remote  
Diagnosis Protection feature.  
1 Press Menu, then press System Setup on the One-Touch keypad. The  
display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find REMOTE DIAGNOSIS  
PROTECTION ?, then press Enter.  
3 The display prompts you to turn the feature ON or OFF. Press 1 to turn  
it ON or 2 to turn it OFF.  
4 The SELECT LANGUAGE? setup menu selection is displayed. Refer  
to the next section, Select Language for configuration details.  
5 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
System Setup  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 The display prompts you to turn the key sound ON or OFF.  
Press 1 to turn the sound ON or 2 to turn it OFF. The REMOTE  
DIAGNOSIS PROTECTION ? setup menu selection is displayed.  
Refer to the next section, Remote Diagnosis Protection for  
configuration details.  
1
6 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Remote Diagnosis Protection  
Remote diagnosis is a feature which allows Xerox or other authorized  
personnel to perform diagnostics on your machine via telephone.  
If you want to disable remote diagnosis (to protect your machine from being  
serviced by an unauthorized person), you must activate the Remote  
Diagnosis Protection feature.  
1 Press Menu, then press System Setup on the One-Touch keypad. The  
display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find REMOTE DIAGNOSIS  
PROTECTION ?, then press Enter.  
3 The display prompts you to turn the feature ON or OFF. Press 1 to turn  
it ON or 2 to turn it OFF.  
4 The SELECT LANGUAGE? setup menu selection is displayed. Refer  
to the next section, Select Language for configuration details.  
5 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
System Setup  
1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select Language  
You can select the LCD display language. The available choices are:  
English, German, French, Italian, and Spanish.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find SELECT LANGUAGE?,  
then press Enter.  
3 Press the Up or Down button to choose the desired display language,  
then press Enter. You can also press the number of the language in the  
display.  
4 ECONO MODE SETTING ? setup menu selection is displayed. Refer  
to the next section, Econo Mode for configuration details.  
5
To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Econo Mode Setting  
Econo Mode can be set to on to conserve the supply of toner in your Laser  
Printer Cartridge.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the  
One-Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until ECONO MODE SETTING ? is  
displayed. Then press Enter.  
The display prompts you to set the mode to ON or OFF.  
1-38  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Press 1 to turn Econo Mode ON or, 2 to turn Econo Mode OFF.  
1
Note: Print quality may be reduced when using Econo Mode.  
4 The LAST FAX DATA REPRINT ? setup menu selection is displayed.  
Refer to the next section, Last Fax Data Reprint for configuration  
details.  
5 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Last Fax Data Reprint  
If the toner is low or empty, the received fax page may be too light to read  
the message. If the fax message was lost because of low or empty toner, use  
the Last Fax Data Reprint feature to print the last fax data. Your machine  
continuously stores the last 10 pages of received fax data, and updates the  
pages each time you receive a fax.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until LAST FAX DATA REPRINT ? is  
displayed, then press Enter.  
.
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
3 Press 1 to print the last 10 pages of received fax. If you want to clear  
the data to save memory, press 2. After clearing memory, full memory  
is available until a new fax is received.  
4 The FLASH DOWNLOAD ? setup menu item is displayed. Press the  
Stop button.  
System Setup  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Press 1 to turn Econo Mode ON or, 2 to turn Econo Mode OFF.  
1
Note: Print quality may be reduced when using Econo Mode.  
4 The LAST FAX DATA REPRINT ? setup menu selection is displayed.  
Refer to the next section, Last Fax Data Reprint for configuration  
details.  
5 To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Last Fax Data Reprint  
If the toner is low or empty, the received fax page may be too light to read  
the message. If the fax message was lost because of low or empty toner, use  
the Last Fax Data Reprint feature to print the last fax data. Your machine  
continuously stores the last 10 pages of received fax data, and updates the  
pages each time you receive a fax.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display indicates RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until LAST FAX DATA REPRINT ? is  
displayed, then press Enter.  
.
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
3 Press 1 to print the last 10 pages of received fax. If you want to clear  
the data to save memory, press 2. After clearing memory, full memory  
is available until a new fax is received.  
4 The FLASH DOWNLOAD ? setup menu item is displayed. Press the  
Stop button.  
System Setup  
1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting Speaker Volume  
1 Press the Speaker button on the front panel to adjust the speaker  
volume. If you cannot hear a dial tone, check the phone line connection.  
2 The display indicates PHONE. Press the Up or Down button  
repeatedly until the desired loudness setting is displayed. Loudness is  
set in the range from 1 through 7, with 7 representing the loudest  
setting.  
3 After choosing the desired volume level, press the Speaker button to  
return to the Standby mode.  
Setting the Clock Mode  
You can configure your machine to display time using either a 12 hour or 24  
hour format.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Data (01) button on the  
One-Touch keypad. PAPER SIZE appears on the display.  
2 Press the Up button.  
CLOCK MODE appears on the LCD display.  
The display prompts you to select either a 12 hour or 24 hour Clock  
Mode.  
3 Press 1 to select a 12 hour Clock Mode or, Press 2 to select a 24 hour  
Clock Mode .  
1-40  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Date and Time  
The current date and time are shown in the display when the machine is on  
and ready for use (Standby mode). The date and time are printed on all  
faxes you send.  
1
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Date & Time button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The current date and time are displayed. A flashing  
cursor in the display prompts you to enter the date.  
2 Using the Number keypad, enter the current date using a MMDDYY  
date format. If you make a mistake, use the right and left buttons to  
move the cursor to the digit you wish to change.  
12-03-1998  
04:06 (PM)  
After entering the date the flashing cursor will move into the first digit  
of the time.  
3 Using the Number keypad, enter the current time. Remember to enter  
the time according to the current Clock Mode setting (12 or 24 hour  
format). Refer to the previous section, CLOCK MODE for details.  
Note: AM or PM is selected by pressing the Up or Down arrow.  
4 Press Enter when the date and time settings displayed are correct.  
The display indicates the date and time you have set, then returns to  
Standby mode.  
Note: If an invalid number is entered, the machine beeps and does not  
proceed to the next step. If this happens, enter the correct number.  
System Setup  
1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the System ID (Your Number and Name)  
In some countries you are required by law to indicate your fax number on  
any fax you send. The System ID, including your telephone number and  
name, will be printed at the top of each page sent from your machine.  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System ID button on the One-  
Touch keypad. The display prompts you to enter the telephone number.  
If there is a number previously registered, the number appears.  
2 Enter the telephone number (up to 20 digits) to which your machine is  
connected. You can enter spaces with the Pause button or a dash with  
the # button.  
If an incorrect number is entered, press the Right or Left button to  
move the cursor under the incorrect digit, then enter the correct number  
or press the Delete button to delete the number.  
3 Press Enter when the correct number is displayed. The display prompts  
you to enter your ID name.  
4 Enter your ID name. This can be any name up to 20 characters in  
length. You can enter alphanumeric characters using the Number  
keypad. Special symbols such as + and - can be included by pressing 0  
repeatedly. If you want to enter the same letter or number in succession  
(for example, SS, AA, 777), enter one digit, then move the cursor by  
pressing the Right button, and enter the next digit.  
Use the Right button to insert a space in the name, Pressing the Right  
button two times moves the cursor two positions to the right, creating a  
space.  
For additional details on how to use the Number keypad to enter  
alphanumeric characters, see Entering Alphanumeric Characters on  
page 3-24.  
1-42  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Press Enter when the name in the display is correct.  
1
Note: If there is a number and name previously registered, the number  
and name appear in the upper line and ED:1 DEL:2 NXT:3 in the bottom  
line. Press 1 to edit the existing number. Press 2 to delete the number. The  
machine deletes the number and continues to the next step. Press 3 to  
keep the number and continue.  
Print Priority  
To print a PC document while the machine is printing a received fax, the  
printing of the fax can be interrupted. Press the PRINT PRIORITY button  
to enable this feature. The display indicates PP in the lower right corner.  
The interrupted fax data will be stored in memory. To disable this feature,  
press the PRINT PRIORITY button again. The display will no longer  
indicate PP. The length of time Print Priority is in effect can be set using the  
Print Priority feature. Refer to User Options (System Data) on page 1-47  
for details.  
Dual  
The WorkCentre 385 can perform more than one function at the same time.  
For example, it can simultaneously:  
Print a PC document while sending a fax.  
Receive a fax into memory while making a copy.  
Receive a fax into memory while printing a PC document.  
Store a fax document for later transmission while printing an incoming  
fax.  
System Setup  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Press Enter when the name in the display is correct.  
1
Note: If there is a number and name previously registered, the number  
and name appear in the upper line and ED:1 DEL:2 NXT:3 in the bottom  
line. Press 1 to edit the existing number. Press 2 to delete the number. The  
machine deletes the number and continues to the next step. Press 3 to  
keep the number and continue.  
Print Priority  
To print a PC document while the machine is printing a received fax, the  
printing of the fax can be interrupted. Press the PRINT PRIORITY button  
to enable this feature. The display indicates PP in the lower right corner.  
The interrupted fax data will be stored in memory. To disable this feature,  
press the PRINT PRIORITY button again. The display will no longer  
indicate PP. The length of time Print Priority is in effect can be set using the  
Print Priority feature. Refer to User Options (System Data) on page 1-47  
for details.  
Dual  
The WorkCentre 385 can perform more than one function at the same time.  
For example, it can simultaneously:  
Print a PC document while sending a fax.  
Receive a fax into memory while making a copy.  
Receive a fax into memory while printing a PC document.  
Store a fax document for later transmission while printing an incoming  
fax.  
System Setup  
1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While the machine is performing dual tasks, press the Dual button to toggle  
the display between the current operation and the new operation.  
Reports  
Your fax machine can print reports containing useful information like  
Scheduled Jobs and System Data. The following reports are available:  
Journal (One-Touch button 14)  
The journal consists of two reports, a Transmission Report and a  
Reception Report. Each report contains information concerning  
transmission or reception activities. They can be printed on command,  
or automatically if certain conditions are met (see Selectable Options on  
page 1-48). These reports will be automatically printed after every 40  
transmissions or receptions if auto is selected.  
Help List (One-Touch button 15)  
This quick reference guide consists of a list detailing the machine’s  
basic functions and operating instructions.  
TX Confirm (One-Touch button 16)  
The Message Confirmation Report lists important information about  
faxes sent from your machine including: the remote site fax number,  
number of pages faxed, elapsed time of the operation, the  
communication mode, and the communication results.  
You can set up your machine to print a TX Confirm report:  
Automatically after each transmission (ON).  
Automatically only if an error occurs during transmission (ERR).  
The machine can be set to print no report at all (OFF). You can  
print this report manually at any time you want.  
1-44  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While the machine is performing dual tasks, press the Dual button to toggle  
the display between the current operation and the new operation.  
Reports  
Your fax machine can print reports containing useful information like  
Scheduled Jobs and System Data. The following reports are available:  
Journal (One-Touch button 14)  
The journal consists of two reports, a Transmission Report and a  
Reception Report. Each report contains information concerning  
transmission or reception activities. They can be printed on command,  
or automatically if certain conditions are met (see Selectable Options on  
page 1-48). These reports will be automatically printed after every 40  
transmissions or receptions if auto is selected.  
Help List (One-Touch button 15)  
This quick reference guide consists of a list detailing the machine’s  
basic functions and operating instructions.  
TX Confirm (One-Touch button 16)  
The Message Confirmation Report lists important information about  
faxes sent from your machine including: the remote site fax number,  
number of pages faxed, elapsed time of the operation, the  
communication mode, and the communication results.  
You can set up your machine to print a TX Confirm report:  
Automatically after each transmission (ON).  
Automatically only if an error occurs during transmission (ERR).  
The machine can be set to print no report at all (OFF). You can  
print this report manually at any time you want.  
1-44  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Schedule Job (One-Touch button 17)  
The Schedule Information List provides information about documents  
currently stored for Delayed Transmission, Priority Transmission,  
Memory Transmission, Continuous Polling, and TX Polling. The list  
shows the starting time, type of operation, etc.  
1
Phone Book (One-Touch button 18)  
This Telephone Numbers List indicates all of the numbers currently  
stored in machine memory as One-Touch Dial numbers, Speed Dial  
numbers, and Group Dial numbers.  
System List (One-Touch button 19)  
This System Data List indicates the status of the user-selectable options.  
See User Options (System Data) on page 1-47. After changing any  
setting, print this list to confirm your changes.  
System Setup  
1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Reports  
To Print Reports:  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2 Press the One-Touch button corresponding to the desired report on the  
One-Touch keypad. Refer to the table below:  
One-Touch  
Button #  
Button Label  
Report/List Name  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Journal  
Transmission or Reception Journal  
Help List  
Help List  
TX Confirm  
Schedule Job  
Phone Book  
System List  
Message Confirmation Report  
Schedule Information List  
Telephone Numbers List  
System Data List  
The selected list will be printed out.  
Other Reports  
Multi-Communication Report  
This report is printed automatically after sending to or receiving from  
more than one location and provides detailed information about the  
operation.  
Note: Any report which is configured to print automatically will not print if  
your machine runs out of paper, has a paper jam, or is printing a file sent  
from a PC.  
1-46  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Options (System Data)  
Your machine has various user-selectable features. These options are preset  
at the factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the  
options are currently set, print the System List. For more information on  
printing the list, see Printing Reports on page 1-46.  
1
Setting an Option  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2 Press the System Data button on the One-Touch keypad.  
The display shows the first option menu.  
3 Scroll through the options by pressing the Down or Up buttons  
repeatedly.  
4 When the option you want appears in the display, enter the number for  
the desired setting.  
Or  
You can use Right or Left buttons to select the desired setting.  
5 Press the Enter button to store your choice in memory.  
You can exit from setup mode at any time by pressing the Stop button.  
When you press the Stop button, the machine stores the options you  
changed and returns to the Standby mode.  
System Setup  
1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selectable Options  
These instructions assume you’ve followed the steps listed in the previous  
procedure, Setting an Option, and the machine is prompting you to change  
one of the options listed below.  
All of these options are menu settings accessed by the One-Touch button  
01, System Data.  
PAPER SIZE - Select the paper size you will be printing on.  
Press 1 for letter (LTR), 2 for A4 size, or 3 to use legal (LGL) size  
paper.  
MESSAGE CONF. - A message confirmation report showing  
transmission information; whether the transmission was successful,  
how many pages were sent, etc.  
Press 1 to print a confirmation report automatically each time you send  
a fax (ON).  
Press 2 to turn this feature off (OFF).  
Press 3 to print only when an error occurs and the transmission was not  
successful (ERR).  
AUTO JOURNAL - The Journal is a report providing detailed  
information about the previous 40 communication operations including  
times and dates.  
Press 1 to print the Journal automatically after every 40 transmissions  
or receptions (ON).  
Press 2 to disable automatic printing of the Journal (OFF). You can still  
print Journal reports manually at any time. See Printing Reports on  
page 1-46.  
1-48  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOTE CODE - The remote receive start code allows you to initiate  
fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT. LINE  
jack on the back of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone  
and hear fax tones, enter the Remote Code and the machine will start  
receiving. The Remote Code is preset to *9* at factory. You may  
change the Remote Code by selecting any number from 0 to 9 on the  
numeric keypad.  
1
POWER SAVING - The power saving menu item lets you reduce  
power usage when the printer is idle.  
Press 1 to turn the feature ON. The display asks you to determine the  
length of time the printer waits after printing a job before going to a  
reduced power state. Press one of the following:  
1 for 10 minutes  
2 for 15 minutes  
3 for 30 minutes  
4 for 45 minutes  
5 for 60 minutes  
Or  
If your printer is used constantly, press 2 to turn Power Saving OFF.  
This keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time.  
DIAL MODE - Select the type of dial system your fax machine is  
connected to:  
Press 1 if the fax machine is connected to a tone (Touch Tone) dial line.  
Press 2 if the fax machine is connected to a pulse (Rotary) dial line.  
System Setup  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ECM MODE (Error Correction Mode) - This mode compensates for  
poor line quality and ensures accurate, error-free communication with  
any other ECM-equipped facsimile machine. If the line quality is poor,  
transmission time may be increased when ECM is enabled.  
Press 1 to turn the Error Correction mode on.  
Press 2 to turn the Error Correction mode off.  
RX REDUCTION - When receiving a document as long as or longer  
than the paper installed in your machine, the machine can reduce the  
data in the document to fit the paper size currently loaded in the  
machine.  
Use this feature if you want to automatically reduce an incoming page  
(that would otherwise be divided into two pages) to fit on a single page.  
If the fax machine cannot reduce the data to fit into one page with this  
feature enabled, the data is divided and printed in actual size on two or  
more sheets.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on. Note that this feature does not apply to  
the copy mode.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off. The overflow data will be printed out on  
a second page.  
1-50  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
H. REDUCTION (Horizontal) - If you turn the RX reduction feature  
on, you are allowed to set the Horizontal Reduction feature on or off.  
With Horizontal Reduction enabled, the machine will reduce an  
incoming page containing overflow data along the vertical axis only.  
The net effect of Horizontal Reduction will be a vertical compression of  
the image as shown below:  
1
Received data  
Original  
If you want to reduce incoming pages equally along both axes in order  
to maintain the proportionality of the original image, turn the horizontal  
reduction feature off. If you turn this feature off, the machine reduces  
the data as shown below.  
Received data  
Original  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
System Setup  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISCARD SIZE - When receiving or copying a document as long as or  
longer than the paper installed in your fax machine, you can set the fax  
machine to discard any excess image at the bottom of the page, to fit  
into the recording paper size.  
If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will be printed on  
two sheets of paper at the actual size.  
If the data is within the margin, and the Auto Reduction feature is  
turned ON, it will be reduced to fit into the appropriate size paper  
(Discard does not take place). If the Auto Reduction feature is turned  
OFF or fails, the data within the margin will be discarded.  
Using the Number keypad, enter the desired discard size, and press the  
Enter button to store your selection.  
REDIAL INTERVAL - Your machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine if it was busy or does not answer the first call attempt.  
Enter the number of minutes (from 1 to 15) using the Number keypad.  
REDIALS - Enter the number of redial attempts (from 0 to 9) you wish  
your machine to make before giving up.  
Note: If you enter 0, the machine will not redial.  
ANSWER ON RING - You can select the number of times your  
machine rings before answering an incoming call. If you are using your  
machine as both a telephone and a fax machine, it is recommended that  
you set the ring count to at least 4 to allow you time to answer a call.  
Enter the ring count by selecting a number from 1 through 7 on the  
Number keypad.  
1-52  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) MODE - Distinctive Ring  
is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different  
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and  
short ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services  
who answer telephones for many different clients. They need to know  
which number someone is calling on to properly answer the phone.  
1
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax machine  
can "learn" the ring pattern you designate to be answered as a fax.  
Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized  
and answered as a fax call. All other ringing patterns will be forwarded  
to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT.  
LINE jack.  
Note: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option,  
Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the  
telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will  
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial  
your FAX number from outside.  
System Setup  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection at any  
time:  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
Press 3 to setup the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. The LCD  
displays WAITING RING. Call your fax number from another  
telephone. It is not necessary to place the call from a fax machine.  
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The  
machine requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
When the machine completes "learning," the LCD displays END DRPD  
SETUP.  
With the DRPD feature active, DRPD appears in the display and the  
previously set reception mode is ignored. If you turn DRPD off, the  
machine returns to any previously set reception mode.  
Note: DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or  
connect the machine to another telephone line.  
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the  
machine answers with a fax tone, then have a call placed to a different  
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT. LINE  
jack.  
1-54  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEND FROM MEMORY - With this feature enabled, all transmission  
documents are automatically scanned into memory, and it will not be  
necessary to wait until documents in the Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) are sent out before you can send or store other fax jobs.  
1
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
LOCAL ID - Enabling this feature causes the machine to automatically  
print the page number, date, and time of the reception at the bottom of  
each page of a received document.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
PRIORITY TERM - You can set your machine to turn Print Priority off  
automatically if there is no further PC printing activity. There are two  
user selectable interval options; 8 hours or 30 minutes.  
Press 1 to select 8 hours. Print Priority is turned off automatically 8  
hours after PC printing is completed.  
Press 2 to select 30 minutes. Print Priority is turned off automatically  
30 minutes after PC printing is completed.  
Note: Refer to Print Priority on page 1-43 for details on the Print Priority  
feature.  
REPRINT - This feature allows you to turn the Last Fax Data Reprint  
memory storage feature on or off.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
System Setup  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLOCK MODE - Use this feature to determine how time is displayed  
on your machine.  
Press 1 to select a 12 hour Clock Mode.  
Press 2 to select a 24 hour Clock Mode.  
1-56  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a Copy  
Chapter 2 Making a Copy  
Set Up Your Machine 2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter2/chpt2.htm [07/09/1999 14:33:44]  
 
Chapter 2  
2
Making a Copy  
Making a Copy  
Your machine is a high quality copier which offers the following features:  
Adjustable Contrast - The contrast setting can be changed to obtain  
the best copy quality for documents containing faint markings, dark  
images, photographs or other halftone images.  
Multiple copies - 1 to 99 copies of the document can be made.  
Enlarge\Reduce - You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image  
from 50% to 200% in increments of 1%.  
Collation - When the Copy Collate menu option is set to On, the  
machine sorts the print job. For example, if you print two copies of a  
three-page document, the machine prints one complete document (page  
1, page 2, page 3) before printing a second copy (page 1, page 2, and  
page 3).  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To make a quick copy:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 If necessary, press the Contrast button.  
You may choose NORMAL, DARKEN, LIGHTEN or PHOTO.  
4 Press the Copy button.  
5 Using the Number keypad, enter the number of copies you wish to  
make. The default setting is 01 copy.  
6 Press the Copy button.  
Or  
Press the Start button.  
The machine copies the document.  
Note: When making copies, resolution is automatically set to Super Fine.  
The Copy Collate menu is not available if you reduce or enlarge the image  
size. The Enlarge\Reduce menu is not available if you set the copy job to  
be collated.  
2-2  
Making a Copy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To make copies using the Copy menu features:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 If necessary, press the Contrast button.  
You may choose NORMAL, DARKEN, LIGHTEN or PHOTO.  
2
4 Press the Copy button to display the COPY menu. For two or more  
copies (2 to 99), enter the desired number using the Number keypad,  
then press the Down button.  
COPY  
[01-99] <01>  
Making a Copy  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 The display shows the next option: the REDUCE\ENLARGE menu.  
REDUCE\ENLARGE  
1.AUTO 2.MANUAL  
a) Selecting 1. AUTO, will cause the WorkCentre 385 to  
automatically reduce the copy size of each page to fit on a single  
page.  
b) Selecting 2. MANUAL, brings up the COPY RATE menu, where  
you can manually adjust the copy image scale size settings.  
The number in the right corner of the bottom line shows the current  
image percentage. To reduce or enlarge the image size, enter the  
percent value (50 to 200) using the Number keypad.  
ENTER RATE  
[50-200] <100>  
Press the Down button to confirm your settings.  
6 The display shows the next option: the COPY COLLATE menu.  
[COPY COLLATE]  
1:ON 2:OFF  
2-4  
Making a Copy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When making multiple copies, there are two collate options: ON and  
OFF.  
Selecting 1:ON will make 1 copy of page 1, 2, and 3 in order, then  
makes a second copy of 1, 2, and 3 until a total of n copies has been  
made.  
SORT  
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
Selecting 2:OFF will make n copies of page one, n copies of page  
two, and so on. These copy sets will all be stacked on top of each  
other.  
GROUP  
1
2
1
2
1
2
Press 1 or 2 to choose the desired collation method. You can also press  
the Down button to choose the default collation setting; 2.OFF. The  
LCD display scrolls back and shows the first option: number of copies.  
7 Press the Start button or the Copy button to begin the copy operation.  
Note: When setting the copy options, pressing the Copy button will begin  
the copy operation immediately without displaying any remaining options.  
Making a Copy  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending a Fax  
Chapter 3 Sending a Fax  
Options for Sending a Fax Using the WorkCentre 385 3-1  
Manual Faxing 3-2  
Preparing Documents for Faxing 3-2  
Sending a Fax Manually 3-3  
Sending a Fax Using a One-Touch Number 3-4  
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial Number 3-5  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing (Multi-Address Transmission) 3-5  
Sending a Fax After Talking 3-6  
Canceling Transmission 3-7  
Confirming Transmission 3-8  
Memory Transmission (Broadcasting) 3-9  
Delayed Transmission 3-11  
Adding Documents to a Standby Operation 3-13  
Canceling a Standby Operation 3-14  
Configuring Automtic Dialing Features 3-15  
One-Touch Dialing 3-15  
Storing a Number for One-Touch Dialing 3-15  
Speed Dialing 3-18  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing 3-18  
Group Dialing (for Multi-Address Transmission) 3-19  
Storing One-Touch or Speed Dial Numbersfor Group Dialing 3-19  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast 3-21  
Resolution 3-21  
Contrast 3-23  
Using the Number Keypad 3-23  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters 3-24  
Keypad Character Assignments 3-26  
Entering Numbers 3-26  
Editing Numbers or Names 3-27  
Inserting a Pause 3-27  
Other Functions 3-28  
Redial 3-28  
Redial Memory 3-28  
Searching for a Number in Memory 3-28  
Searching Sequentially through Memory 3-29  
Searching by the First Letter 3-29  
Tone 3-30  
Automatic Redial 3-31  
Priority Transmission 3-32  
Polling 3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter3/chpt3.htm (1 of 2) [07/09/1999 14:33:51]  
 
Sending a Fax  
What is Polling? 3-34  
Being Polled By a Remote Machine (TX POLL) 3-34  
Adding Documents To the Job to be Polled 3-36  
Cancelling a Job Already in Memory Which is Waiting to be Polled 3-37  
PC Faxing 3-38  
What is LaserFax Lite? 3-38  
LaserFAX Installation 3-38  
Sending Faxes with LaserFAX Lite 3-39  
Fax Conversion Dialog Advanced Features 3-43  
Cover Sheet Options 3-44  
The Send Options Button 3-45  
The Attach Button 3-46  
The Keep Button 3-48  
LaserFAX Application Features 3-49  
LaserFAX Application Toolbar Features 3-50  
The LaserFAX Phonebook 3-53  
Adding Entries to the Phonebook 3-53  
Troubleshooting LaserFAX 3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter3/chpt3.htm (2 of 2) [07/09/1999 14:33:51]  
Chapter 3  
Sending a Fax  
3
Options for Sending a Fax Using the  
WorkCentre 385  
Using the WorkCentre 385, you can send a fax in one of two ways:  
By placing the document in the Automatic Document Feeder and  
entering the information required for faxing at the WorkCentre 385  
Control Panel. This is called Manual Faxing.  
For information and instructions for Manual Faxing, refer to Manual  
Faxing on page 3-2.  
By faxing the document directly from your computer workstation using  
LaserFAX software. This is called PC Faxing.  
For information and instructions for PC Faxing, refer to PC Faxing on  
page 3-38.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Faxing  
This section provides information and instructions for faxing a document  
from the WorkCentre 385 using the WorkCentre 385 Control Panel.  
Preparing Documents for Faxing  
You can fax documents that are printed on standard letter, legal or A4 size  
paper. Follow these guidelines to prepare your documents.  
Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents into the  
machine:  
carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
coated paper  
onion skin or thin paper  
wrinkled or creased paper  
curled or rolled paper  
torn paper  
Note: If your document falls into any of the above categories, make a copy  
of the document first. Use the copy for insertion into the Automatic  
Document Feeder.  
Remove all staples and paper clips before feeding the document.  
Make sure any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely  
dry before loading the document.  
Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights of paper.  
3-2  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending a Fax Manually  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3
document guide  
The display alternately reads DOCUMENT READY and shows the  
remaining memory capacity. Up to 30 sheets may be inserted at a time.  
To insert more than one sheet, ensure that the bottom sheet enters first.  
Stagger the leading edge of the sheets slightly and insert them with light  
pressure to ensure smooth feeding.  
To add pages while the fax is sending, insert them face down into the  
Automatic Document Feeder on top of the already loaded sheets.  
3 If necessary, adjust the document resolution and contrast. See  
Resolution on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23 .  
Manual Faxing  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Using the Number keypad, enter the number of the fax machine to  
which you wish to send the document. If you make a mistake while  
entering a number, move the cursor under the incorrect digit by using  
the Right or Left buttons, and correct the number. You may also delete  
incorrect numbers by pressing the Delete button.  
5 Press the Start button when the number appears correctly in the  
display. The machine dials the number and begins to transmit the fax.  
If you wish to cancel the fax, press the Stop button two times.  
Sending a Fax Using a One-Touch Number  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Press the One-Touch button (01 through 20) to which you assigned the  
telephone number you wish to call. For information on storing numbers  
in memory, see Configuring Automatic Dialing Features on page 3-15.  
The machine will scan the document and dial the number automatically.  
When the remote fax machine answers the phone, the document will be  
transmitted automatically.  
3-4  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Using the Number keypad, enter the number of the fax machine to  
which you wish to send the document. If you make a mistake while  
entering a number, move the cursor under the incorrect digit by using  
the Right or Left buttons, and correct the number. You may also delete  
incorrect numbers by pressing the Delete button.  
5 Press the Start button when the number appears correctly in the  
display. The machine dials the number and begins to transmit the fax.  
If you wish to cancel the fax, press the Stop button two times.  
Sending a Fax Using a One-Touch Number  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Press the One-Touch button (01 through 20) to which you assigned the  
telephone number you wish to call. For information on storing numbers  
in memory, see Configuring Automatic Dialing Features on page 3-15.  
The machine will scan the document and dial the number automatically.  
When the remote fax machine answers the phone, the document will be  
transmitted automatically.  
3-4  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial Number  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Press the Speed button, then enter a two digit speed dial location  
number. For information on storing numbers in memory, Speed Dialing  
on page 3-18.  
4 Press the Start button to dial the number.  
The machine will scan the document and dial the number automatically.  
When the remote fax machine answers the phone, the document will be  
transmitted automatically.  
3
Note: You can store One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers so you can dial  
your most frequently used numbers with one touch of a button or a two digit  
speed dial number. For information on storing numbers in memory, see  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features on page 3-15.  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-Address Transmission)  
Group Dialing can be used in conjunction with Memory Transmission or  
Delayed Transmission faxing operations. However, before you can access  
the Group Dialing feature, Group Numbers must be configured. See Group  
Dialing (for Multi-Address Transmission) on page 3-19 for more  
information.  
Manual Faxing  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending a Fax Using a Speed Dial Number  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Press the Speed button, then enter a two digit speed dial location  
number. For information on storing numbers in memory, Speed Dialing  
on page 3-18.  
4 Press the Start button to dial the number.  
The machine will scan the document and dial the number automatically.  
When the remote fax machine answers the phone, the document will be  
transmitted automatically.  
3
Note: You can store One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers so you can dial  
your most frequently used numbers with one touch of a button or a two digit  
speed dial number. For information on storing numbers in memory, see  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features on page 3-15.  
Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing  
(Multi-Address Transmission)  
Group Dialing can be used in conjunction with Memory Transmission or  
Delayed Transmission faxing operations. However, before you can access  
the Group Dialing feature, Group Numbers must be configured. See Group  
Dialing (for Multi-Address Transmission) on page 3-19 for more  
information.  
Manual Faxing  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To send a fax using the Group Dialing feature:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3
Follow the procedure for the desired operation (see Memory  
Transmission (Broadcasting) on page 3-9 or Delayed Transmission on  
page 3-11).  
4 When you come to the step where the display prompts you to enter the  
remote fax number, enter the Group Number.  
Note: A Group Number may be assigned to a One-Touch button or  
designated as a two digit numerical keypad number. You can use only one  
Group Number in a single operation.  
5 Continue the procedure to complete the (Memory Transmission or  
Delayed Transmission) operation. Your machine will automatically  
scan the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder into  
memory and subsequently dial each of the numbers included in the  
group.  
Sending a Fax After Talking  
If you have a regular phone connected to the EXT.LINE jack on the back of  
the machine, you can send a fax after speaking with a person at the remote  
site.  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
3-6  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To send a fax using the Group Dialing feature:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3
Follow the procedure for the desired operation (see Memory  
Transmission (Broadcasting) on page 3-9 or Delayed Transmission on  
page 3-11).  
4 When you come to the step where the display prompts you to enter the  
remote fax number, enter the Group Number.  
Note: A Group Number may be assigned to a One-Touch button or  
designated as a two digit numerical keypad number. You can use only one  
Group Number in a single operation.  
5 Continue the procedure to complete the (Memory Transmission or  
Delayed Transmission) operation. Your machine will automatically  
scan the document loaded in the Automatic Document Feeder into  
memory and subsequently dial each of the numbers included in the  
group.  
Sending a Fax After Talking  
If you have a regular phone connected to the EXT.LINE jack on the back of  
the machine, you can send a fax after speaking with a person at the remote  
site.  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
3-6  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the EXT. LINE jack;  
call the remote location.  
Note: For a successful fax transmission, it is imperative that steps 4 to 6  
occur in the proper order.  
4 When finished talking, instruct the person at the remote location to  
press the start button on their fax machine. They can then hang up.  
The remote fax machine will send the initial fax tones.  
3
5 Wait until you hear the fax tone from the remote fax machine.  
6
Press the Start button on the WorkCentre 385. The machine begins to  
transmit.  
7 Replace the handset.  
Canceling Transmission  
To cancel a fax:  
1 Press the Stop button at any time during the transmission.  
The machine continues to send the fax, and the display shows a  
message warning you that the machine is in use.  
2 Press the Stop button again to cancel the transmission.  
Manual Faxing  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 Pick up the handset of the telephone connected to the EXT. LINE jack;  
call the remote location.  
Note: For a successful fax transmission, it is imperative that steps 4 to 6  
occur in the proper order.  
4 When finished talking, instruct the person at the remote location to  
press the start button on their fax machine. They can then hang up.  
The remote fax machine will send the initial fax tones.  
3
5 Wait until you hear the fax tone from the remote fax machine.  
6
Press the Start button on the WorkCentre 385. The machine begins to  
transmit.  
7 Replace the handset.  
Canceling Transmission  
To cancel a fax:  
1 Press the Stop button at any time during the transmission.  
The machine continues to send the fax, and the display shows a  
message warning you that the machine is in use.  
2 Press the Stop button again to cancel the transmission.  
Manual Faxing  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Confirming Transmission  
A Message Confirmation report shows whether the transmission was  
successful and how many pages were sent.  
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the  
machine beeps and returns to Standby mode.  
To print a Message Confirmation report:  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2 Press the TX Confirm (16) button on the One-Touch keypad.  
3 The machine prints out a Message Confirmation report.  
You can also configure your machine to print out a confirmation report  
automatically each time a fax is sent.  
To automatically print a confirmation report:  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2 Press the System Data button (01) on the One-Touch keypad.  
3 Press the Down or Up buttons repeatedly until MESSAGE CONF.  
appears in the display.  
a) Press 1 to print a confirmation report automatically each time you  
send a fax (ON).  
Or  
b) Press 2 to turn this feature off (OFF).  
Or  
c) Press 3 to print only when an error occurs and the transmission was  
not successful (ERR).  
3-8  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If an error occurred during your fax transmission, an error message appears  
in the display. If you receive an error message, press Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
For a listing of error messages and their meanings, see LCD Display Error  
Messages on page 7-8.  
Memory Transmission (Broadcasting)  
With Memory Transmission, documents are stored in memory and  
automatically sent to one or more remote stations. Use this feature to send  
your documents to multiple locations.  
You can store a maximum of ten fax numbers for a memory transmission.  
If you need to send your fax to more than ten locations, you can increase the  
number of fax locations dialed by including a Group Dial number as one of  
the ten numbers.  
3
After sending, the documents are automatically erased from memory.  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
If necessary, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see  
Resolution on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
3 Press the Menu button, then press the Memory TX button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
Manual Faxing  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If an error occurred during your fax transmission, an error message appears  
in the display. If you receive an error message, press Stop to clear the  
message and try to send the document again.  
For a listing of error messages and their meanings, see LCD Display Error  
Messages on page 7-8.  
Memory Transmission (Broadcasting)  
With Memory Transmission, documents are stored in memory and  
automatically sent to one or more remote stations. Use this feature to send  
your documents to multiple locations.  
You can store a maximum of ten fax numbers for a memory transmission.  
If you need to send your fax to more than ten locations, you can increase the  
number of fax locations dialed by including a Group Dial number as one of  
the ten numbers.  
3
After sending, the documents are automatically erased from memory.  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
If necessary, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see  
Resolution on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
3 Press the Menu button, then press the Memory TX button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
Manual Faxing  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Enter the telephone number of the remote machine. There are several  
methods available to do this:  
Direct entry of the telephone number using the numeric keypad.  
One-Touch keypad dialing of stored telephone numbers (see One-  
Touch Dialing on page 3-15).  
Speed Number dialing using the numeric keypad (see Speed  
Dialing on page 3-18).  
5 Press the START button.  
The display prompts you to enter another fax number.  
ANOTHER  
FAX NUMBER?  
6 If you have entered the last fax number setting, press the Stop button.  
Or  
If you want to send the document to more than one location, press the  
Enter button and enter another fax number using the numeric keypad,  
One-Touch keypad, or two digit Speed Dial number.  
The number appears in the display.  
Repeat Step 6 until you have entered the last fax number setting and  
pressed the Stop button.  
7 The document is scanned into memory. The display shows the  
remaining memory capacity and the number of pages. The machine  
dials the first telephone number and begins sending the document.  
Note: Only a single Group Dial number may be used per Memory  
Transmission operation.  
3-10  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Delayed Transmission  
You can configure your machine to send a fax at a specified time. Up to 30  
delayed transmission operations can be reserved in your machine.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
desired, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see Resolution on  
page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button, then press the Delay TX button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
3 Enter the telephone number of the remote machine. There are several  
methods available to do this:  
Direct entry of the telephone number using the numeric keypad.  
3
One-Touch keypad dialing of stored telephone numbers (see One-  
Touch Dialing on page 3-15).  
Group and Speed number dialing using the numeric keypad (see  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features on page 3-15).  
4 Press the Enter button.  
The display prompts you to enter another fax number.  
ANOTHER  
FAX NUMBER?  
Manual Faxing  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 If you have entered the last fax number setting, press the Stop button.  
Or  
If you want to send the document to more than one location, press the  
Enter button and enter another fax number using the numeric keypad,  
One-Touch keypad, or two digit Speed Dial number.  
The number appears in the display.  
Repeat Step 5 until you have entered the last fax number setting and  
pressed the Stop button.  
Note: Only a single Group dial number may be used in a Delayed  
Transmission Operation.  
6 The display prompts you to enter an ID for the transmission. If you  
want to assign a name to the transmission, enter it using the Number  
keypad. If not, proceed to Step 7.  
For details on how to enter letters using the Number keypad, see  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters on page 3-24.  
7 Press the Enter button. The display shows the current time on the upper  
line and prompts you to enter the time the fax will be sent.  
CURRENT 12:30PM  
START 12:30PM  
3-12  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Using the Number keypad, enter the time the fax will be sent. Use the  
Up or Down button to switch between AM and PM. If you set a time  
earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on  
the following day.  
9 After entering the time, press the Enter button.  
10 The machine scans the document into memory, returns to Standby  
mode and displays a reminder that a Delayed Transmission is set.  
Note: If you want to cancel the Delayed Transmission, see Canceling a  
Standby Operation on page 3-14.  
3
Adding Documents To a Standby Operation  
You can add documents to a Delayed Transmission previously entered into  
memory.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
necessary, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see Resolution  
on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3 Press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD  
display prompts you to select ADD or CANCEL. Note that 1. Add is  
already selected in the LCD display.  
OPERATION  
1.ADD 2.CANCEL  
Manual Faxing  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Using the Number keypad, enter the time the fax will be sent. Use the  
Up or Down button to switch between AM and PM. If you set a time  
earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on  
the following day.  
9 After entering the time, press the Enter button.  
10 The machine scans the document into memory, returns to Standby  
mode and displays a reminder that a Delayed Transmission is set.  
Note: If you want to cancel the Delayed Transmission, see Canceling a  
Standby Operation on page 3-14.  
3
Adding Documents To a Standby Operation  
You can add documents to a Delayed Transmission previously entered into  
memory.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
necessary, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see Resolution  
on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3 Press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD  
display prompts you to select ADD or CANCEL. Note that 1. Add is  
already selected in the LCD display.  
OPERATION  
1.ADD 2.CANCEL  
Manual Faxing  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the Enter button to confirm. The display shows operations  
currently reserved in memory.  
09:00AM DELAY TX  
FAX1  
5 Press the Down or Up buttons repeatedly until you find the operation  
you want to add documents to, then press the Enter button.  
6 The machine automatically adds the new documents to the pages  
already in memory, displays the number of total pages and added pages,  
then returns to Standby mode.  
Canceling a Standby Operation  
1 Press Menu, then press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch  
keypad. The display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
2 Press 2. The display shows the operations currently reserved in  
memory.  
3 Press the Down or Up button repeatedly until you find the operation  
you want to cancel.  
4 Press the Enter button to cancel the job.  
3-14  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the Enter button to confirm. The display shows operations  
currently reserved in memory.  
09:00AM DELAY TX  
FAX1  
5 Press the Down or Up buttons repeatedly until you find the operation  
you want to add documents to, then press the Enter button.  
6 The machine automatically adds the new documents to the pages  
already in memory, displays the number of total pages and added pages,  
then returns to Standby mode.  
Canceling a Standby Operation  
1 Press Menu, then press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch  
keypad. The display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
2 Press 2. The display shows the operations currently reserved in  
memory.  
3 Press the Down or Up button repeatedly until you find the operation  
you want to cancel.  
4 Press the Enter button to cancel the job.  
3-14  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features  
One-Touch Dialing  
One-Touch dialing lets you use any one of the 20 One-Touch buttons  
located on the left of the machine’s control panel to automatically dial a  
number.  
Storing a Number for One-Touch Dialing  
1
When assigning a One-Touch number, press and hold the One-Touch  
button (01 through 20) for 2 seconds. The display shows TXX:, where  
"T" signifies you are assigning a One-Touch number and "XX"  
designates the selected One-Touch button.  
3
2 Enter the number you want to store by using the Number keypad, then  
press Enter.  
To insert a pause between numbers when dialing, press the Redial/  
Pause button.  
If you make a mistake while entering a number, use the Right or Left  
buttons to move the cursor under the wrong digit, then enter the correct  
digit, or press the Delete button.  
3 The display asks you to enter a name. Using the Number keypad, enter  
the desired name (up to 20 alphanumeric characters). For information  
on how to enter names, see Entering Alphanumeric Characters on page  
3-24.  
Or  
If you don’t want to assign a name, skip this step.  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If you assign a name to the number, the name will appear in the  
display whenever you press the One-Touch button.  
4 Press the Enter button when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To set another One-Touch number, press the desired One-Touch button  
and repeat steps 2 through this step.  
Or  
To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Using the One-Touch Address Label Sheet  
A One-Touch label sheet is included with your machine. As you store  
numbers in One-Touch dial buttons, make a note of the numbers on the  
label to remind you which number is stored in each position.  
3-16  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Remove the clear cover and label using a pointed instrument, as shown  
below.  
Label  
3
Note: You may want to use pencil in case you wish to change these  
numbers later.  
2 Write information on the label and replace the label and cover.  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dialing  
You can store up to 80 numbers in two digit Speed Dial locations (01-80).  
Storing a Number for Speed Dialing  
1 Press and hold the Speed button for 2 seconds.  
2 Enter a two digit location number (01 through 80) to which you want to  
store a number, then press the Enter button.  
If a number is already stored in the location, the display shows the  
number in the upper line and ED:1 DEL:2 NXT:3 in the bottom line.  
Press 1 to edit that number, 2 to delete that number, or 3 to keep that  
number and choose another location.  
3 Enter the telephone number you want to store, then press the Enter  
button.  
4 To assign a name to the number, enter the desired name. For  
information on how to enter names, see Entering Alphanumeric  
Characters on page 3-24.  
Or  
If you don’t want to assign a name, skip this step.  
5 Press the Enter button when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
6 To store more telephone numbers, repeat steps 2 through 5.  
Or  
To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
3-18  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Group Dialing (for Multi-Address Transmission)  
Multiple One-Touch and speed dial numbers can be registered as a Group.  
By using the Group number, you can send a document to multiple parties in  
a single operation. Up to ten numbers may be stored as a Group. Your  
machine will dial the remote numbers in a stored sequence. If the number is  
busy, your machine will dial the next stored number and after dialing all of  
the stored numbers, will automatically redial any number previously busy.  
Before you can use this feature, you must coordinate and store Group  
numbers.  
Storing One-Touch or Speed Dial Numbers for Group  
Dialing  
3
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Group Dial button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
2 Enter a two digit location number (01 through 80) you want to use for  
Group Dial, then press the Enter button.  
The display prompts you to press a One-Touch button or enter a Speed  
Dial number which you wish to include in the group.  
ENTER ONE-TOUCH  
/ SPEED DIAL> ##  
3 Press the One-Touch button assigned to the fax number you wish to  
include in the group.  
Or  
Enter the two digit Speed Dial location to which the fax number you  
wish to include in the group is stored.  
Configuring Automatic Dialing Features  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the Enter button. Repeat steps 3 and this step to include more  
destination numbers in the group.  
5 Press the Stop button when you have entered all the telephone numbers  
you want to include in the group. The display asks you to enter a name.  
6 To assign a name to the Group, enter the desired name.  
Or  
If you don’t want to assign a name, skip this step.  
7 Press the Enter button. If you want to store another group dial number,  
repeat steps 2 through 7.  
Or  
To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Assigning a Group to a One-Touch Button  
You can assign a Group number to a One-Touch button. The One-Touch  
button can then be used to call all the telephone numbers stored in the  
Group. Before you can use this feature, you must first register the Group  
number and then assign the registered Group number to an empty One-  
Touch button. Refer to Storing a Number for One-Touch Dialing on page 3-  
15 or Storing a Number for Speed Dialing on page 3-18 for details.  
1 Press and hold the One-Touch button that you want to assign (01  
through 20) for 2 seconds.  
2 Enter the two digit Group number.  
3
Press the Enter button. The group number is assigned to the selected  
One-Touch button, and the display asks you to enter One-Touch button  
for another group dial if you wish.  
3-20  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 If you want to store another One-Touch Group Dial number, repeat  
steps 1 to 3.  
Or  
If you want to return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
It is recommended that you fax documents that were printed with a  
typewriter, felt tip pen, black ink or laser printer. The paper should be white  
or very light. The document should be of normal weight; do not use  
cardboard. Blue lines on a ruled pad will not fax well.  
When sending typical text based documents, you should not need to adjust  
the resolution and the contrast. However, if you send documents with  
unusual contrast characteristics, including photographs, you can adjust the  
resolution and contrast to ensure a high quality transmission.  
3
Resolution  
Press the Resolution button to increase sharpness and clarity. By pressing  
the Resolution button repeatedly after loading a document, you can choose  
between STANDARD, FINE, or SUPER FINE modes.  
The document types recommended for these settings are described in the  
table on the next page.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 If you want to store another One-Touch Group Dial number, repeat  
steps 1 to 3.  
Or  
If you want to return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
It is recommended that you fax documents that were printed with a  
typewriter, felt tip pen, black ink or laser printer. The paper should be white  
or very light. The document should be of normal weight; do not use  
cardboard. Blue lines on a ruled pad will not fax well.  
When sending typical text based documents, you should not need to adjust  
the resolution and the contrast. However, if you send documents with  
unusual contrast characteristics, including photographs, you can adjust the  
resolution and contrast to ensure a high quality transmission.  
3
Resolution  
Press the Resolution button to increase sharpness and clarity. By pressing  
the Resolution button repeatedly after loading a document, you can choose  
between STANDARD, FINE, or SUPER FINE modes.  
The document types recommended for these settings are described in the  
table on the next page.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode  
Recommended for...  
Standard Documents with normal sized characters.  
Fine  
Documents containing small characters or thin lines, or for sending  
documents printed with a dot-matrix printer.  
Super  
Fine  
Documents containing extremely fine detail. SUPER FINE mode  
works only if the remote machine also supports SUPER FINE  
resolution.  
Note: Super Fine Resolution mode is not available if the Send From  
Memory Feature is set to ON. If Send From Memory is set to ON, all  
documents will be stored to memory in Fine Resolution mode.  
If the WorkCentre 385 is set to Super Fine Resolution mode and the remote  
fax machine does not support Super Fine Resolution, the WorkCentre 385  
will transmit using the highest resolution mode supported by the remote fax  
machine.  
3-22  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contrast  
Press the Contrast button to compensate for the brightness or darkness of  
your faxed document. By pressing the Contrast button repeatedly after  
loading a document, you can choose between NORMAL, DARKEN,  
LIGHTEN, or PHOTO.  
Mode Recommended for...  
Normal Faxing most documents.  
Darken  
Documents containing light print or faint pencil markings.  
Lighten Documents containing dark print.  
3
Photo  
Photographs or documents containing color or shades of gray. Your  
machine will not transmit color, but it will scan and send up to 256  
shades of gray.  
Note: You can set the default resolution and contrast. The default mode  
will be in effect when a document is sent or copied unless you change the  
setting for an individual operation. The machine will automatically revert to  
default settings after the operation is completed. For details on how to set  
the default resolution and contrast, see Home Resolution and Home  
Contrast on page 1-35.  
Using the Number Keypad  
As you perform various tasks, you will need to enter names and numbers  
using the Number keypad. For example, when you set up your machine, you  
enter your name (or your company’s name) and telephone number. When  
setting up One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers, you will also need to enter  
telephone numbers and names.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Contrast  
Press the Contrast button to compensate for the brightness or darkness of  
your faxed document. By pressing the Contrast button repeatedly after  
loading a document, you can choose between NORMAL, DARKEN,  
LIGHTEN, or PHOTO.  
Mode Recommended for...  
Normal Faxing most documents.  
Darken  
Documents containing light print or faint pencil markings.  
Lighten Documents containing dark print.  
3
Photo  
Photographs or documents containing color or shades of gray. Your  
machine will not transmit color, but it will scan and send up to 256  
shades of gray.  
Note: You can set the default resolution and contrast. The default mode  
will be in effect when a document is sent or copied unless you change the  
setting for an individual operation. The machine will automatically revert to  
default settings after the operation is completed. For details on how to set  
the default resolution and contrast, see Home Resolution and Home  
Contrast on page 1-35.  
Using the Number Keypad  
As you perform various tasks, you will need to enter names and numbers  
using the Number keypad. For example, when you set up your machine, you  
enter your name (or your company’s name) and telephone number. When  
setting up One-Touch or Speed Dial numbers, you will also need to enter  
telephone numbers and names.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When prompting you to enter a name, the LCD display will appear as  
shown below :  
ID>_  
You can then use the procedures described below to enter up to 20 letters  
and special characters, numbers or spaces.  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters  
1 Locate the button labelled with the character you want. Press the button  
repeatedly until the correct letter appears in the display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press the 6 key (labeled MNO). Each  
time you press the 6 key, the display shows a different letter, first M,  
the N, and O, and finally 6.  
You can enter special characters (space, plus sign, etc.) in the name by  
using the 0 key. See Keypad Character Assignments on page 3-26.  
3-24  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When prompting you to enter a name, the LCD display will appear as  
shown below :  
ID>_  
You can then use the procedures described below to enter up to 20 letters  
and special characters, numbers or spaces.  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters  
1 Locate the button labelled with the character you want. Press the button  
repeatedly until the correct letter appears in the display.  
For example, to enter the letter O, press the 6 key (labeled MNO). Each  
time you press the 6 key, the display shows a different letter, first M,  
the N, and O, and finally 6.  
You can enter special characters (space, plus sign, etc.) in the name by  
using the 0 key. See Keypad Character Assignments on page 3-26.  
3-24  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The letter appears in the display.  
ID>O  
2 To enter another letter, locate the Number keypad button labeled with  
the letter you want. Press the button repeatedly until the letter appears  
in the display.  
If the next letter is printed on the same Number keypad button, move  
the cursor by pressing the Right button, then press the Number keypad  
button labeled with the letter you want.  
The blinking cursor moves right and the next letter appears in the  
display.  
3
ID>OP  
If the letter that appears is not the one you wish to enter, press the  
Number keypad button repeatedly until the letter you wish to enter  
appears in the display. Select additional letters in the same way.  
3 When you finish entering letters, press the Enter button.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keypad Character Assignments  
Key  
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
1
2
1
A ’ B ’ C ’ 2  
D ’ E ’ F ’ 3  
G ’ H ’ I ’ 4  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
J ’ K ’ L ’ 5  
M ’ N ’ O ’ 6  
P ’ Q ’ R ’ S ’ 7  
T ’ U ’ V ’ 8  
W ’ X ’ Y ’ Z ’ 9  
Space ’ , ’ . ’ / ’ + ’ * ’ & ’ 0  
Entering Numbers  
You can enter the telephone number of a remote fax machine manually by  
using the Number keypad. The number you press appears in the LCD  
display.  
TEL>5551212_  
3-26  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keypad Character Assignments  
Key  
Assigned numbers, letters or characters  
1
2
1
A ’ B ’ C ’ 2  
D ’ E ’ F ’ 3  
G ’ H ’ I ’ 4  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
J ’ K ’ L ’ 5  
M ’ N ’ O ’ 6  
P ’ Q ’ R ’ S ’ 7  
T ’ U ’ V ’ 8  
W ’ X ’ Y ’ Z ’ 9  
Space ’ , ’ . ’ / ’ + ’ * ’ & ’ 0  
Entering Numbers  
You can enter the telephone number of a remote fax machine manually by  
using the Number keypad. The number you press appears in the LCD  
display.  
TEL>5551212_  
3-26  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can also use One-Touch buttons (including a Group Dial number) or a  
two digit Speed Dial number for entering telephone numbers.  
Your machine lets you send the same document to more than one location.  
After you enter a fax number, the display prompts you to enter ANOTHER  
FAX NUMBER?. To enter another fax number, you can enter the number  
manually, use a One-Touch button, or a two digit Speed Dial number.  
Note: You cannot use a Group Number Dialing button to enter another fax  
number.  
Editing Numbers or Names  
3
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, move the cursor  
under the wrong digit by pressing the Right or Left button. Press the correct  
number to change or press the Delete button to delete the number.  
Inserting a Pause  
With some private telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9 for  
example) and listen for a second dial tone before dialing an outside number.  
In such cases, you must insert a pause in the telephone number. You can  
insert a pause in the telephone number when you are setting up a One-  
Touch or Speed Dial number, or when you dial a number without lifting the  
handset.  
To insert a pause, press the Pause button at the appropriate place while  
entering the telephone number.  
When you dial a number, the dialing process pauses for about 3 seconds at  
the point where you inserted the pause. If you require a longer pause time,  
press the Pause button twice.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can also use One-Touch buttons (including a Group Dial number) or a  
two digit Speed Dial number for entering telephone numbers.  
Your machine lets you send the same document to more than one location.  
After you enter a fax number, the display prompts you to enter ANOTHER  
FAX NUMBER?. To enter another fax number, you can enter the number  
manually, use a One-Touch button, or a two digit Speed Dial number.  
Note: You cannot use a Group Number Dialing button to enter another fax  
number.  
Editing Numbers or Names  
3
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, move the cursor  
under the wrong digit by pressing the Right or Left button. Press the correct  
number to change or press the Delete button to delete the number.  
Inserting a Pause  
With some private telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9 for  
example) and listen for a second dial tone before dialing an outside number.  
In such cases, you must insert a pause in the telephone number. You can  
insert a pause in the telephone number when you are setting up a One-  
Touch or Speed Dial number, or when you dial a number without lifting the  
handset.  
To insert a pause, press the Pause button at the appropriate place while  
entering the telephone number.  
When you dial a number, the dialing process pauses for about 3 seconds at  
the point where you inserted the pause. If you require a longer pause time,  
press the Pause button twice.  
Setting Document Resolution and Contrast  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other Functions  
Redial  
To redial the last number called:  
1 Press Redial. If a document is loaded in the document tray, the machine  
automatically begins to send.  
Redial Memory  
To search through Redial memory:  
1 Press and hold the Redial button for 2 seconds.  
The Redial memory in your machine retains the last 10 numbers called.  
If you have dialed the same number multiple times, the machine does  
not count the duplicates.  
2 Press the Down or Up buttons to search through memory until you find  
the number you want.  
3 When the number you want appears in the display, press the Start  
button to commence dialing. If a document is loaded in the Automatic  
Document Feeder, transmission begins when the remote machine  
answers the call.  
Searching for a Number in Memory  
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan  
from A to Z sequentially, or you can search using the first letter of the name  
associated with the number.  
3-28  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Searching Sequentially through Memory  
1 Press the Search button, then press the Up or Down buttons to move  
through the memory until you find the number you want.  
Pressing the Down button allows you to search downward through the  
entire memory in alphabetical order (from A to Z), and pressing the Up  
button allows you to search upward in reverse alphabetical order (from  
Z to A).  
Each time you press the Down or Up buttons, the display shows the  
next number stored in memory.  
While searching through the machine’s memory, you’ll see that each  
entry is preceded by one of three letters: ‘T’ for One-Touch dial, ‘S’ for  
speed, or ‘G’ for group dial number. These letters tell you how the  
number is stored.  
3
2 When the number you want appears in the display, press the Start  
button to commence dialing.  
If a document is loaded, transmission will begin when the remote fax  
machine answers the phone.  
Searching by the First Letter  
1 Press Search, then press the button labeled with the letter you want to  
search for. A name beginning with the letter appears in the display.  
For example, if you want to find the name MOBILE, press the "6"  
button, which is labeled with the letters MNO.  
Other Functions  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Searching Sequentially through Memory  
1 Press the Search button, then press the Up or Down buttons to move  
through the memory until you find the number you want.  
Pressing the Down button allows you to search downward through the  
entire memory in alphabetical order (from A to Z), and pressing the Up  
button allows you to search upward in reverse alphabetical order (from  
Z to A).  
Each time you press the Down or Up buttons, the display shows the  
next number stored in memory.  
While searching through the machine’s memory, you’ll see that each  
entry is preceded by one of three letters: ‘T’ for One-Touch dial, ‘S’ for  
speed, or ‘G’ for group dial number. These letters tell you how the  
number is stored.  
3
2 When the number you want appears in the display, press the Start  
button to commence dialing.  
If a document is loaded, transmission will begin when the remote fax  
machine answers the phone.  
Searching by the First Letter  
1 Press Search, then press the button labeled with the letter you want to  
search for. A name beginning with the letter appears in the display.  
For example, if you want to find the name MOBILE, press the "6"  
button, which is labeled with the letters MNO.  
Other Functions  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Press the Up or Down buttons to move through the memory until you  
find the name you want.  
3 When the name and number you want appear, press the Start button to  
initiate dialing.  
Tone  
If your telephone service is configured for pulse dialing, you may still need  
to use Touch Tone signals to perform special operations by phone. Bank-  
by-phone and voice mail are two examples of systems that require Touch  
Tone signals. You can send Touch Tone signals by following these steps:  
1 Dial the number using pulse dialing.  
2 When the remote phone answers, press *.  
Any numbers you now press will be sent as Touch tones for the  
remainder of the call.  
3 Enter the remaining numbers required by the service. The machine  
returns to the pulse mode after you complete the call.  
3-30  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Press the Up or Down buttons to move through the memory until you  
find the name you want.  
3 When the name and number you want appear, press the Start button to  
initiate dialing.  
Tone  
If your telephone service is configured for pulse dialing, you may still need  
to use Touch Tone signals to perform special operations by phone. Bank-  
by-phone and voice mail are two examples of systems that require Touch  
Tone signals. You can send Touch Tone signals by following these steps:  
1 Dial the number using pulse dialing.  
2 When the remote phone answers, press *.  
Any numbers you now press will be sent as Touch tones for the  
remainder of the call.  
3 Enter the remaining numbers required by the service. The machine  
returns to the pulse mode after you complete the call.  
3-30  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Flash  
Some special phone services require a switch-hook signal for proper  
operation. For example, if you have call waiting, you can put a call on hold  
and take a second call on the same line by pressing the switch-hook button.  
Pressing the Flash button performs the equivalent of a switch-hook  
operation.  
1 When you are on the telephone and hear the call waiting signal, press  
the Flash button once. The first caller is placed on hold; you are  
connected to the second caller.  
2 Press the Flash button again to return to the first caller.  
3
CAUTION: If your telephone service does not use the switch-hook signal,  
do not press the Flash button during a call. Doing so could disconnect the  
call.  
Automatic Redial  
If the number you dial to send a fax is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine hangs up and waits for the specified retry period. It then redials  
the number. If, after the specified number of retry attempts (retry count)  
the machine fails to connect, it returns to Standby mode.  
1 While the machine is redialing, the LCD display shows BUSY  
REDIAL.  
2 If you want to redial the number immediately, press the Start button.  
To stop redialing, press the Stop button.  
You can select the number of retries and the retry term between each redial  
attempt. See User Options (System Data) on page 1-47.  
Other Functions  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash  
Some special phone services require a switch-hook signal for proper  
operation. For example, if you have call waiting, you can put a call on hold  
and take a second call on the same line by pressing the switch-hook button.  
Pressing the Flash button performs the equivalent of a switch-hook  
operation.  
1 When you are on the telephone and hear the call waiting signal, press  
the Flash button once. The first caller is placed on hold; you are  
connected to the second caller.  
2 Press the Flash button again to return to the first caller.  
3
CAUTION: If your telephone service does not use the switch-hook signal,  
do not press the Flash button during a call. Doing so could disconnect the  
call.  
Automatic Redial  
If the number you dial to send a fax is busy or there is no answer, the  
machine hangs up and waits for the specified retry period. It then redials  
the number. If, after the specified number of retry attempts (retry count)  
the machine fails to connect, it returns to Standby mode.  
1 While the machine is redialing, the LCD display shows BUSY  
REDIAL.  
2 If you want to redial the number immediately, press the Start button.  
To stop redialing, press the Stop button.  
You can select the number of retries and the retry term between each redial  
attempt. See User Options (System Data) on page 1-47.  
Other Functions  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Priority Transmission  
When priority transmission is enabled, a high priority document can be  
transmitted ahead of previously scheduled operations.  
In this operation, the document is scanned into memory. It is immediately  
transmitted at the conclusion of any operation already in progress.  
A priority transmission interrupts a broadcast operation between stations  
(for example, when transmission to station A ends but before transmission  
to station B begins), or between redial attempts.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
necessary, adjust the resolution or contrast. For details, see Resolution  
on page 3-21 andContrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button, then press the Priority TX button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
3 Enter the telephone number of the remote machine. There are several  
methods available to do this:  
Direct entry of the telephone number using the numeric keypad.  
One-Touch Keypad dialing of stored telephone numbers (see One-  
Touch Dialing on page 3-15).  
Speed Number dialing using the numeric keypad (see One-Touch  
Dialing on page 3-15).  
Note: Group Number Dialing functions are not available in a Priority  
Transmission.  
3-32  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 The display prompts you to enter a name for the transmission.  
To assign a name to the transmission, enter it using the Number keypad  
and press the Enter button.  
Or  
If you do not want to assign the transmission a name, press the Enter  
button to skip over this step.  
For details on how to enter letters using the Number keypad, see  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters on page 3-24.  
5 The document is scanned into memory. The display shows the  
remaining memory capacity and the number of pages. The machine  
dials the first telephone number and begins sending the document.  
3
Other Functions  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Polling  
What is Polling?  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document.  
This is useful for sending unattended faxes. The person who wants to  
receive the document calls the machine holding the original and requests  
that the document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding the  
original.  
Note: The remote machine must also support Polling to use this feature.  
Being Polled By a Remote Machine (TX POLL)  
You can program your fax machine to send documents when polled by a  
remote fax machine. It is possible to assign a Poll Code to prevent  
unauthorized polling of your fax machine.  
When you secure your machine using a Poll Code, only those who know the  
code can poll your machine.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
desired, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see page  
Resolution on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3 Press the Polling button on the One-Touch keypad. The display  
prompts you to choose one of the two polling options: TX POLL and  
DELAY RX POLL.  
3-34  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Polling  
What is Polling?  
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a document.  
This is useful for sending unattended faxes. The person who wants to  
receive the document calls the machine holding the original and requests  
that the document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding the  
original.  
Note: The remote machine must also support Polling to use this feature.  
Being Polled By a Remote Machine (TX POLL)  
You can program your fax machine to send documents when polled by a  
remote fax machine. It is possible to assign a Poll Code to prevent  
unauthorized polling of your fax machine.  
When you secure your machine using a Poll Code, only those who know the  
code can poll your machine.  
1 Place the document face down in the Automatic Document Feeder. If  
desired, adjust the resolution and contrast. For details, see page  
Resolution on page 3-21 and Contrast on page 3-23.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3 Press the Polling button on the One-Touch keypad. The display  
prompts you to choose one of the two polling options: TX POLL and  
DELAY RX POLL.  
3-34  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press the Enter button to confirm TX POLL. The display prompts you  
to enter a 4-digit poll code.  
Note: The poll code is preset to 0000 at the factory. This setting  
represents no poll code.  
5 If you want to use a poll code, enter a 4-digit code.  
6 Press the Enter button.  
Or  
If you do not want to secure the transmission with a Poll code, press the  
Enter button when the display shows 0000 for TX-POLL CODE. If you  
previously entered a poll code, and do not want one, you may enter  
0000 and then press the Enter button.  
3
7 The display prompts you to store the document in the machine bulletin  
board memory.  
BULLETIN ?  
Note: If you store the document in the bulletin board memory, more than  
one remote station can poll that document from your machine. If not, the file  
will be automatically erased after being polled by a remote machine.  
Polling  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 To store the document in the bulletin board memory, press the Enter  
button.  
Or  
If you do not want the document to be stored in bulletin board memory,  
press the Stop button.  
9 The machine stores the document in memory. The display shows a  
count of the number of pages being stored in memory and the remaining  
memory capacity.  
10 The machine returns to Standby mode and displays a reminder that a  
Polling Transmission is set. The machine automatically switches to  
FAX mode (automatic receiving) when set to be polled.  
Adding Documents To the Job to be Polled  
If you want to add documents to the original documents waiting in memory  
to be polled, follow the procedure below.  
1 Place the additional documents face down into the Automatic  
Document Feeder.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3
Press the Polling button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD displays  
the polling options.  
4 Press 1 to select TX POLL.  
3-36  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 To store the document in the bulletin board memory, press the Enter  
button.  
Or  
If you do not want the document to be stored in bulletin board memory,  
press the Stop button.  
9 The machine stores the document in memory. The display shows a  
count of the number of pages being stored in memory and the remaining  
memory capacity.  
10 The machine returns to Standby mode and displays a reminder that a  
Polling Transmission is set. The machine automatically switches to  
FAX mode (automatic receiving) when set to be polled.  
Adding Documents To the Job to be Polled  
If you want to add documents to the original documents waiting in memory  
to be polled, follow the procedure below.  
1 Place the additional documents face down into the Automatic  
Document Feeder.  
2 Press the Menu button.  
3
Press the Polling button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD displays  
the polling options.  
4 Press 1 to select TX POLL.  
3-36  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 The display prompts you to enter the poll code. The last used poll code  
is displayed.  
6 Enter the 4-digit Poll code you had previously set, then press the Enter  
button.  
The display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
7 Press 1. The machine scans the new documents into memory and  
returns to Standby mode.  
Cancelling a Job Already in Memory Which is  
Waiting to be Polled  
3
If you want to cancel a job already in memory waiting to be polled, follow  
the procedure below.  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2
Press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD  
display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
3 Press 2.  
The set up information for the last entered polling job is displayed. If  
you have more than one polling job waiting in memory, press the UP or  
DOWN arrows until the set up information for the job you wish to  
cancel is displayed.  
4 Press the Enter button.  
The display prompts ARE YOU SURE?  
5 To cancel the polling job, press 1.YES.  
The job is erased from memory and the machine returns to Standby  
mode.  
Polling  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 The display prompts you to enter the poll code. The last used poll code  
is displayed.  
6 Enter the 4-digit Poll code you had previously set, then press the Enter  
button.  
The display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
7 Press 1. The machine scans the new documents into memory and  
returns to Standby mode.  
Cancelling a Job Already in Memory Which is  
Waiting to be Polled  
3
If you want to cancel a job already in memory waiting to be polled, follow  
the procedure below.  
1 Press the Menu button.  
2
Press the Add/Cancel button on the One-Touch keypad. The LCD  
display prompts you to select 1.ADD or 2.CANCEL.  
3 Press 2.  
The set up information for the last entered polling job is displayed. If  
you have more than one polling job waiting in memory, press the UP or  
DOWN arrows until the set up information for the job you wish to  
cancel is displayed.  
4 Press the Enter button.  
The display prompts ARE YOU SURE?  
5 To cancel the polling job, press 1.YES.  
The job is erased from memory and the machine returns to Standby  
mode.  
Polling  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PC Faxing  
This section provides information and instructions for PC Faxing from a  
computer workstation connected to the WorkCentre 385. Using this  
method, a fax is sent without first printing it and placing the printed  
document in the Automatic Document Feeder. This process is controlled by  
a PC Faxing application called LaserFAX Lite Version 3.5.  
What is LaserFAX Lite?  
LaserFAX Lite software is an application that is used to enable PC Faxing  
using the WorkCentre 385. If selected during the installation of the other  
software components for the WorkCentre 385, the LaserFAX Lite  
application is installed automatically.  
After it is installed, LaserFAX becomes a selection among the printing  
devices for your computer workstation. When you send a fax directly from  
your PC, you simply select LaserFAX as the destination for a print job. A  
LaserFAX dialog is then displayed that prompts you to enter the phone  
number and other information for the fax job.  
LaserFAX Installation  
To install LaserFAX Lite, no additional special hardware is required.  
Simply ensure that the WorkCentre 385 is connected to the computer  
workstation using the supplied IEEE 1284 parallel cable, and a phone line  
has also been connected to the Tel Line input on the back of the  
WorkCentre 385.  
The system requirements and procedures for installing LaserFAX Lite  
software are contained in Chapter 1 - Getting Started. Refer to this chapter  
if LaserFAX Lite is not already installed on your computer workstation.  
3-38  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Faxes with LaserFAX Lite  
The steps performed to fax using LaserFAX Lite are very similar to the  
steps performed to print a document from a word processing application.  
However, when selecting the printer that will receive the document, you  
will select LaserFAX. The dialog displayed will then prompt you to enter  
the phone number of the fax machine you are sending the fax to.  
To fax a document, perform the following steps:  
Note: The following steps are generally the same for all versions of  
Windows. The actual steps you perform may be slightly different depending  
on the Windows version and application you are faxing from. Additional  
detail for some of the dialogs is available later in this section of the User  
Guide. You are also encouraged to refer to the on-line help for the  
LaserFAX application.  
3
1 Open a word processing application on the computer workstation.  
2 Create or open the document to be faxed.  
3 Select Print from the word processing application.  
4 When the application print dialog is displayed, select LaserFAX on  
LFPT.PRN as the printer.  
5 Select OK or Print to send the document to be printed. Even if you  
have forgotten to load LaserFAX, it will load automatically when you  
send the document to it as a printer.  
PC Faxing  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 After the document has been converted to a fax image, the Fax  
Conversion dialog will pop up prompting you for details of the  
transmission:  
7 Enter the fax number manually or click the Phonebook button to select  
from your LaserFAX Phonebook. If you have already defined entries in  
the Phonebook you can type a key name assigned to a Phonebook entry  
and LaserFAX Lite will look up the associated fax number.  
Note: For information on the LaserFAX phonebook refer to The LaserFAX  
Phonebook on page 3-53. You can also select the Help button and review  
the on-line help topics for this feature.  
8 (Optional) Enter a description of the fax job. While this is an optional  
step, it can be very useful when searching All Jobs Pending or Jobs  
Completed for your fax job.  
3-40  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 (Optional) You may add a Cover Sheet as the first page of your fax by  
either typing the file name for the cover sheet in the Cover sheet: field,  
or by clicking the cover sheet button and selecting from the list of cover  
sheet files displayed. The first time you use this feature you may be  
asked to enter other information required to complete the cover sheet -  
for example the From field. Perform the following steps to enter  
information on the Cover sheet:  
Note: If a new cover sheet is selected, the dialog will expand to include  
areas for you to enter the name of the recipient, the subject of the fax, and a  
short message.  
3
a) If prompted select Yes to define the cover sheet fields.  
b) Double click each user defined field name and type the desired  
information in the filed.  
c) Click OK. If the “Save settings on exit” option is selected  
LaserFAX Lite will remember these settings and not ask you for  
them next time the cover sheet is used. To change the settings use  
the Options, Cover sheets… menu.  
10 (Optional) To hold the fax to be sent at a later time, select the Hold  
checkbox.  
11 (Optional) If a printed copy of the fax is desired when the document is  
faxed, select the Print checkbox.  
12 (Optional) Select other features available under the Advanced>>  
button selection. For more information on this features see Fax  
Conversion Dialog Advanced Features on page 3-43.  
PC Faxing  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 To fax the document, click the OK button. This will result in the job  
being displayed in the All jobs pending list in the LaserFAX  
application:  
14 The fax job will appear in this list until it is transmitted using the  
features of the LaserFAX application. At that time, it will be displayed  
in the Jobs completed list.  
Note: The features of the LaserFAX application are briefly described under  
LaserFAX Application Features on page 3-49. For more detailed  
information on the features of the LaserFAX application, refer to the on-line  
help system in the LaserFAX application.  
3-42  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Conversion Dialog Advanced Features  
When the Fax Conversion dialog is displayed, there is an Advanced>>  
button that can be selected which makes available several other features for  
the fax job. When the Advanced>> button is selected the dialog below is  
displayed:  
3
Note that the Fax Conversion screen now contains additional fields for the  
cover sheet, and three new buttons; Send options, Attach... and Keep....  
PC Faxing  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cover Sheet Options  
The cover sheet options on this page can be used to select an existing cover  
sheet, or create a new sheet.  
Cover Sheet  
In this location, you can select a previously created and saved cover sheet.  
Recipient  
In this field the recipient of the fax is entered.  
Subject  
The subject of the fax is entered here.  
Message  
The message to be conveyed on the cover sheet is entered here.  
Restore last cover sheet  
When selected, this feature will restore the last cover sheet for the fax job.  
Always Expand  
When this feature is selected, the expanded cover sheet dialog seen in the  
diagram above is displayed by default when the Fax Conversion dialog is  
displayed.  
3-44  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Send Options Button  
Selecting the Send options button will cause the following dialog to be  
displayed:  
Sub Address  
3
A subaddress may be up to 20 digits long and is sometimes used to  
automatically route the outgoing fax to a specific fax machine.  
Signature  
A signature may be up to 20 digits long and may be sent and received with  
the fax. It is the ITU PWD T30 frame. Note that it is not possible to  
transmit a signature if you also wish to perform a turnaround poll in the  
same transmission.  
Fax ID  
This is the identification you send to the remote fax system. If you do not  
enter a value here, the default ID will be the fax number you entered when  
installing LaserFAX. For additional information, see Registration Details  
in the LaserFAX Configuration program.  
PC Faxing  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Attach Button  
The Attach button is used to attach documents to the current fax job by  
referencing the file name of the fax document.  
Using the features available under the Attach... button, documents that are  
already prepared as faxes can be attached to the current job.  
When the Attach... button is selected the following dialog is displayed:  
The features of this dialog are as follows:  
The Fax button displays the list of fax files to choose from.  
The arrow keys are used to change the order of the attachments.  
The Edit button is used to change the displayed path to the attached file.  
The Delete button is used to delete the attachment. This does not delete  
the file from the workstation.  
3-46  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To use the Attach... feature:  
1 Click on the Fax button.  
2 Select the file you want to attach and click on OK. You can select  
several faxes at once by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on  
the faxes that you wish to attach.  
3 When all files are attached to the fax job, select OK to fax the job and  
its attachments.  
Note: For more information on the Attach... feature, refer to on-line help  
within the LaserFAX Lite 3.5 application.  
3
PC Faxing  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Keep Button  
The Keep... button will allow you to keep a copy of the fax on the  
workstation hard disk.  
When the Keep... button is pressed, the following dialog is displayed:  
To use the features of this dialog, perform the following steps:  
1 The name of the file and the application in which it was generated are  
displayed in the Description: field. Edit the description and enter a  
filename. The default file type will be .FAX.  
2 (Optional) Select Delete file after keeping if you want to keep a copy  
of the transmitted fax.  
3-48  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 (Optional) Select Attach to existing file to attach the fax to the end of  
an existing fax document.  
4 (Optional) Click on the Always show file list if you would like this list  
displayed whenever you use the Files button in the LaserFAX  
application.  
5 After making settings on this dialog, select OK to return to the  
Advanced>> dialog.  
LaserFAX Application Features  
In this section, the features of the LaserFAX application are briefly  
described. For additional information on the functions and features of the  
LaserFAX application, refer to the on-line help system for the LaserFAX  
application.  
3
The LaserFAX application is displayed when a fax is sent from the  
WorkCentre 385. The following window is displayed:  
PC Faxing  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 (Optional) Select Attach to existing file to attach the fax to the end of  
an existing fax document.  
4 (Optional) Click on the Always show file list if you would like this list  
displayed whenever you use the Files button in the LaserFAX  
application.  
5 After making settings on this dialog, select OK to return to the  
Advanced>> dialog.  
LaserFAX Application Features  
In this section, the features of the LaserFAX application are briefly  
described. For additional information on the functions and features of the  
LaserFAX application, refer to the on-line help system for the LaserFAX  
application.  
3
The LaserFAX application is displayed when a fax is sent from the  
WorkCentre 385. The following window is displayed:  
PC Faxing  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LaserFAX Application Toolbar Features  
The features of the LaserFAX Toolbar are as follows:  
The Viewer Button  
This will load the LaserFAX Viewer to display the fax file currently  
selected in the All Jobs pending, Received faxes or Fax files list.  
The Print Button  
This will print the current fax or list. Use Printer setup from the File menu  
to select the default printer (or fax machine) to be used.  
The Information Button  
This will show more details of a job in the All Jobs pending, Jobs  
completed, Fax files, etc lists. You can also use this button to see  
information about users or devices. From the details screen displayed on  
your screen, you will be able to edit information about the entry you have  
selected.  
3-50  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Go Button  
This will release the selected fax from hold or failed status. If a job is  
shown as pending, a retry may be scheduled. Clicking on the green traffic  
light will cause the LaserFAX application to try sending again without  
waiting for the retry interval.  
The Stop/Hold Button  
This will stop the current job in progress or place a pending job into Hold  
status. A held job can be released with the Go button.  
3
The Waste Button  
This will delete an entry from a list. In the case of the lists of completed  
transmissions or receptions, it will provide the option to archive the lists to a  
file before deleting them.  
The Keep Button  
This will keep a permanent copy of a fax file. The kept file may then be  
sent on its own, included as an image within another fax, or appended to  
another fax.  
PC Faxing  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Route Button  
This button is used to pass an incoming fax on to one or more LaserFAX  
users on a network.  
Note: See Route fax in the On-line Help for more details.  
The Scan Button  
If you are using an external fax machine with LaserFAX you can use this to  
scan documents into your PC.  
The QuickFax Button  
This allows you to send a fax without using any other program. See the  
QuickFAX screen and on-line Help for more details.  
The Phonebook Button  
This will display the phonebook so that you can select a number from it.  
3-52  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The LaserFAX Phonebook  
The LaserFax application has a phonebook that can be used to enter up to  
20 entries. These entries can then be selected from the phonebook, or can  
be specified by using a key name. For frequently used numbers, this feature  
saves time and effort.  
In the LaserFAX application, select the Display, Phonebook menu item or  
click on the Phonebook icon in the toolbar to view your entries.  
Adding Entries to the Phonebook  
Display the phonebook and click on the Add button or press the INS  
(Insert) key on your keyboard to add a new entry. You must specify a  
unique key name which can then be typed for LaserFAX to look up the fax  
number in your phonebook. The phonebook provides the ability to add a  
description and a fax number for each entry as well as a telephone number  
and comments.  
3
Any entry in the phonebook can be edited by double clicking it.  
Troubleshooting LaserFAX  
When LaserFAX does not activate, ensure that:  
The WorkCentre 385 is connected and plugged in.  
The parallel interface cable is properly connected and is not longer than  
2 metre.  
No error message is displayed on the WorkCentre 385. If an error  
message is displayed, check the Troubleshooting section of this manual  
to diagnose the problem.  
PC Faxing  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving a Fax  
Chapter 4 Receiving a Fax  
Options for Receiving a Fax using the WorkCentre 385 4-1  
Reception Modes 4-2  
Determining the Reception Mode 4-2  
Receiving Automatically in FAX Mode 4-3  
Receiving Automatically in TEL/FAX Mode 4-3  
Receiving Manually in TEL Mode 4-4  
Receiving Automatically in ANS/FAX Mode 4-5  
Receiving a Fax When the Machine is Out of Paper 4-6  
Receiving a Fax Printed Too Light to Read 4-7  
Printing Last Fax Data: 4-7  
Erasing Last Fax Data From Memory 4-8  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) 4-8  
What is Polling? 4-9  
Polling One or More Remote Machines (RX POLL) 4-9  
PC Fax Reception 4-12  
What is LaserFAX Lite? 4-12  
LaserFAX Installation 4-12  
Receiving Faxes With LaserFAX 4-13  
Troubleshooting LaserFAX 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter4/chpt4.htm [07/09/1999 14:35:49]  
 
Chapter 4  
Receiving a Fax  
Options for Receiving a Fax Using the  
WorkCentre 385  
4
Using the WorkCentre 385, you can receive a fax in one of two ways:  
By allowing the WorkCentre 385 to answer, receive, and print all  
incoming faxes. This process normally involves printing of the  
incoming fax. When incoming faxes are received in this manner, there  
is no electronic storage of the fax in memory. When used in this  
manner, the WorkCentre 385 is receiving faxes as a Stand Alone fax  
machine. There are four distinct ways to configure the WorkCentre 385  
as a Stand Alone fax machine.  
For information and instructions for operation as a Stand Alone fax  
machine, refer to Reception Modes on page 4-2.  
By receiving faxes directly to your computer workstation using  
LaserFAX software. This is called PC Fax Reception.  
For information and instructions for PC Fax Reception, refer to PC Fax  
Reception on page 4-12.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reception Modes  
When used as a Stand Alone fax machine, your multi-function machine has  
four reception modes as described below:  
FAX The machine answers an incoming call and immediately goes  
into fax receive mode.  
TEL/FAX The machine answers the incoming call. If a fax signal is  
not detected, the WorkCentre 385 sounds a ringing tone to indicate a  
voice phone call. If the external phone is not lifted while the ringing  
tone is sounding, the machine will switch to automatic fax reception  
mode.  
ANS/FAX To use the ANS/FAX mode, you have to attach an  
answering machine to the EXT. LINE socket on your fax machine. If  
the WorkCentre 385 senses a fax tone, it automatically switches to fax  
reception mode. However, if a fax is not sensed, the WorkCentre 385  
routes the call to the answering machine, and the caller can leave a  
message.  
TEL In TEL mode, automatic fax reception is turned off. You can  
receive a fax only by manually picking up the external phone to accept  
the call and pressing Start to receive the fax.  
Determining the Reception Mode  
The current reception mode is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD  
display window.  
JUL-18-1998 100%  
Reception mode  
08:30PM  
FAX  
If you seldom use the fax line for phone conversations, set the  
WorkCentre 385 to either FAX mode or TEL/FAX mode. In these modes,  
the WorkCentre 385 answers incoming calls and receives faxes  
automatically.  
4-2  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reception Modes  
When used as a Stand Alone fax machine, your multi-function machine has  
four reception modes as described below:  
FAX The machine answers an incoming call and immediately goes  
into fax receive mode.  
TEL/FAX The machine answers the incoming call. If a fax signal is  
not detected, the WorkCentre 385 sounds a ringing tone to indicate a  
voice phone call. If the external phone is not lifted while the ringing  
tone is sounding, the machine will switch to automatic fax reception  
mode.  
ANS/FAX To use the ANS/FAX mode, you have to attach an  
answering machine to the EXT. LINE socket on your fax machine. If  
the WorkCentre 385 senses a fax tone, it automatically switches to fax  
reception mode. However, if a fax is not sensed, the WorkCentre 385  
routes the call to the answering machine, and the caller can leave a  
message.  
TEL In TEL mode, automatic fax reception is turned off. You can  
receive a fax only by manually picking up the external phone to accept  
the call and pressing Start to receive the fax.  
Determining the Reception Mode  
The current reception mode is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD  
display window.  
JUL-18-1998 100%  
Reception mode  
08:30PM  
FAX  
If you seldom use the fax line for phone conversations, set the  
WorkCentre 385 to either FAX mode or TEL/FAX mode. In these modes,  
the WorkCentre 385 answers incoming calls and receives faxes  
automatically.  
4-2  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: During PC file printing, an incoming fax will be received and stored  
in memory. The memory is also used for PC file printing. If you are printing  
a large PC file, it is recommended that you stop PC file printing while  
receiving a fax. This will maximize memory space for the incoming fax.  
Receiving Automatically in FAX Mode  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates FAX.  
2 When a fax call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring and  
receives it automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and the System Setup  
button on the One-Touch keypad. Ringer volume is the first item displayed.  
Use the Up or Down button to set the desired loudness.  
4
Receiving Automatically in TEL/FAX Mode  
If you have an ordinary phone connected to the EXT. LINE jack on the back  
of the machine, you can select TEL/FAX mode to receive fax transmissions  
and answer voice calls.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates TEL/FAX.  
2 When a call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring. If a fax  
tone is sensed, the machine receives the fax automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and System Setup on the  
Reception Modes  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: During PC file printing, an incoming fax will be received and stored  
in memory. The memory is also used for PC file printing. If you are printing  
a large PC file, it is recommended that you stop PC file printing while  
receiving a fax. This will maximize memory space for the incoming fax.  
Receiving Automatically in FAX Mode  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates FAX.  
2 When a fax call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring and  
receives it automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and the System Setup  
button on the One-Touch keypad. Ringer volume is the first item displayed.  
Use the Up or Down button to set the desired loudness.  
4
Receiving Automatically in TEL/FAX Mode  
If you have an ordinary phone connected to the EXT. LINE jack on the back  
of the machine, you can select TEL/FAX mode to receive fax transmissions  
and answer voice calls.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates TEL/FAX.  
2 When a call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring. If a fax  
tone is sensed, the machine receives the fax automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and System Setup on the  
Reception Modes  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: During PC file printing, an incoming fax will be received and stored  
in memory. The memory is also used for PC file printing. If you are printing  
a large PC file, it is recommended that you stop PC file printing while  
receiving a fax. This will maximize memory space for the incoming fax.  
Receiving Automatically in FAX Mode  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates FAX.  
2 When a fax call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring and  
receives it automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and the System Setup  
button on the One-Touch keypad. Ringer volume is the first item displayed.  
Use the Up or Down button to set the desired loudness.  
4
Receiving Automatically in TEL/FAX Mode  
If you have an ordinary phone connected to the EXT. LINE jack on the back  
of the machine, you can select TEL/FAX mode to receive fax transmissions  
and answer voice calls.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates TEL/FAX.  
2 When a call comes in, the machine answers on the second ring. If a fax  
tone is sensed, the machine receives the fax automatically.  
Note: To change the number of rings before the machine answers an  
incoming call, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
To adjust ringer volume, press the Menu button and System Setup on the  
Reception Modes  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One-Touch keypad. Ringer volume is the first item displayed. Use the Up  
or Down button to set the desired loudness.  
3 If a fax signal is not sensed when the machine answers the call, you will  
hear a second ringing tone indicating a voice phone call.  
4 Lift the handset to answer the call. If the voice call is not answered  
within a specified time, the machine will switch to automatic fax  
reception mode.  
Receiving Manually in TEL Mode  
If you have an ordinary phone connected to the EXT. LINE jack on the back  
of the machine, you can answer voice phone calls and receive faxes  
manually.  
4-4  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-Touch keypad. Ringer volume is the first item displayed. Use the Up  
or Down button to set the desired loudness.  
3 If a fax signal is not sensed when the machine answers the call, you will  
hear a second ringing tone indicating a voice phone call.  
4 Lift the handset to answer the call. If the voice call is not answered  
within a specified time, the machine will switch to automatic fax  
reception mode.  
Receiving Manually in TEL Mode  
If you have an ordinary phone connected to the EXT. LINE jack on the back  
of the machine, you can answer voice phone calls and receive faxes  
manually.  
4-4  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates TEL.  
2 Answer an incoming call by picking up the receiver.  
3 If you hear a fax tone, or if the person calling asks you to receive a fax,  
press the Start button on the machine.  
If the machine is equipped with an extension phone, you may also press  
the characters * 9 * (star-nine-star) on the extension telephone to  
initiate reception.  
Note: The characters * 9 * (star-nine-star) are preset at the factory as the  
default remote receive start code for machines with extension phones. The  
asterisks in the code are fixed characters, but the number can be changed.  
For more information, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
4 Replace the handset. The machine begins receiving and returns to  
Standby mode when reception is complete.  
4
Receiving Automatically in ANS/FAX Mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT. LINE  
jack on the back of your machine.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates ANS/FAX. Any  
incoming voice calls will be answered by the answering machine. The  
caller can then leave a message on the answering machine.  
2 If a fax tone is detected on the line, the fax receive mode is  
automatically activated.  
Reception Modes  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates TEL.  
2 Answer an incoming call by picking up the receiver.  
3 If you hear a fax tone, or if the person calling asks you to receive a fax,  
press the Start button on the machine.  
If the machine is equipped with an extension phone, you may also press  
the characters * 9 * (star-nine-star) on the extension telephone to  
initiate reception.  
Note: The characters * 9 * (star-nine-star) are preset at the factory as the  
default remote receive start code for machines with extension phones. The  
asterisks in the code are fixed characters, but the number can be changed.  
For more information, see Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
4 Replace the handset. The machine begins receiving and returns to  
Standby mode when reception is complete.  
4
Receiving Automatically in ANS/FAX Mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT. LINE  
jack on the back of your machine.  
1 Press the Receive button until the display indicates ANS/FAX. Any  
incoming voice calls will be answered by the answering machine. The  
caller can then leave a message on the answering machine.  
2 If a fax tone is detected on the line, the fax receive mode is  
automatically activated.  
Reception Modes  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If you set your machine to ANS/FAX mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to the Xerox  
WorkCentre 385, the machine will automatically go into fax receive mode  
after six rings.  
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set it to  
answer incoming calls after one ring.  
If the machine is in TEL mode, and an answering machine is connected to  
the machine, turn off the answering machine. This will prevent the  
answering machine’s outgoing message from interrupting your phone  
conversation.  
Receiving a Fax When the Machine is Out of Paper  
Incoming fax transmissions are automatically stored in memory under the  
following conditions:  
The WorkCentre 385 is out of paper  
A paper jam occurs  
A document is copying  
A list is printing  
4-6  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: If you set your machine to ANS/FAX mode and your answering  
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to the Xerox  
WorkCentre 385, the machine will automatically go into fax receive mode  
after six rings.  
If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set it to  
answer incoming calls after one ring.  
If the machine is in TEL mode, and an answering machine is connected to  
the machine, turn off the answering machine. This will prevent the  
answering machine’s outgoing message from interrupting your phone  
conversation.  
Receiving a Fax When the Machine is Out of Paper  
Incoming fax transmissions are automatically stored in memory under the  
following conditions:  
The WorkCentre 385 is out of paper  
A paper jam occurs  
A document is copying  
A list is printing  
4-6  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After receiving documents, the machine displays MEMORY RECEIVED  
and the cause. For example, NO PAPER.  
When the condition is cleared, for example by loading new paper or  
clearing a jam, the machine will automatically print the fax stored in  
memory.  
If you clear the problem while the machine is receiving documents into  
memory, it will print the stored document immediately upon clearing the  
problem.  
Receiving a Fax Printed Too Light to Read  
If the toner level in the Laser Printer Cartridge is low or empty, you may  
receive a fax which is printed too light to read. Fortunately, the machine  
stores the last 10 pages of received fax data, continuously updating the  
pages whenever a fax is received. This feature is always enabled to prevent  
loss of fax data due to low or empty toner. Follow the procedures below to  
print the Last Fax Data or to erase Last Fax Data from memory.  
4
Printing Last Fax Data:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the  
One-Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until the display shows LAST FAX  
DATA REPRINT ?.  
3
Press Enter.  
4 The LED display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
Reception Modes  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After receiving documents, the machine displays MEMORY RECEIVED  
and the cause. For example, NO PAPER.  
When the condition is cleared, for example by loading new paper or  
clearing a jam, the machine will automatically print the fax stored in  
memory.  
If you clear the problem while the machine is receiving documents into  
memory, it will print the stored document immediately upon clearing the  
problem.  
Receiving a Fax Printed Too Light to Read  
If the toner level in the Laser Printer Cartridge is low or empty, you may  
receive a fax which is printed too light to read. Fortunately, the machine  
stores the last 10 pages of received fax data, continuously updating the  
pages whenever a fax is received. This feature is always enabled to prevent  
loss of fax data due to low or empty toner. Follow the procedures below to  
print the Last Fax Data or to erase Last Fax Data from memory.  
4
Printing Last Fax Data:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the  
One-Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until the display shows LAST FAX  
DATA REPRINT ?.  
3
Press Enter.  
4 The LED display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
Reception Modes  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
After receiving documents, the machine displays MEMORY RECEIVED  
and the cause. For example, NO PAPER.  
When the condition is cleared, for example by loading new paper or  
clearing a jam, the machine will automatically print the fax stored in  
memory.  
If you clear the problem while the machine is receiving documents into  
memory, it will print the stored document immediately upon clearing the  
problem.  
Receiving a Fax Printed Too Light to Read  
If the toner level in the Laser Printer Cartridge is low or empty, you may  
receive a fax which is printed too light to read. Fortunately, the machine  
stores the last 10 pages of received fax data, continuously updating the  
pages whenever a fax is received. This feature is always enabled to prevent  
loss of fax data due to low or empty toner. Follow the procedures below to  
print the Last Fax Data or to erase Last Fax Data from memory.  
4
Printing Last Fax Data:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the  
One-Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME ?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until the display shows LAST FAX  
DATA REPRINT ?.  
3
Press Enter.  
4 The LED display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
Reception Modes  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Press 1: PRINT to print the last 10 pages of received fax data.  
Full memory is available until a new fax is received.  
Erasing Last Fax Data From Memory  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find LAST FAX DATA  
REPRINT?.  
3 Press Enter.  
The LCD display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
4 Press 2: CLEAR to erase the Last Fax Data from memory.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables the use of a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
number used to call a phone with this feature is identified by a distinctive  
ringing pattern consisting of various combinations of long and short ringing  
tones.  
This feature is often used by answering services that answer telephones for  
many different clients and need to know which number is being called by  
the ringing pattern of the phone.  
4-8  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Press 1: PRINT to print the last 10 pages of received fax data.  
Full memory is available until a new fax is received.  
Erasing Last Fax Data From Memory  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find LAST FAX DATA  
REPRINT?.  
3 Press Enter.  
The LCD display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
4 Press 2: CLEAR to erase the Last Fax Data from memory.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables the use of a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
number used to call a phone with this feature is identified by a distinctive  
ringing pattern consisting of various combinations of long and short ringing  
tones.  
This feature is often used by answering services that answer telephones for  
many different clients and need to know which number is being called by  
the ringing pattern of the phone.  
4-8  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Press 1: PRINT to print the last 10 pages of received fax data.  
Full memory is available until a new fax is received.  
Erasing Last Fax Data From Memory  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the System Setup button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
The display shows RINGER VOLUME?.  
2 Press the Up or Down button until you find LAST FAX DATA  
REPRINT?.  
3 Press Enter.  
The LCD display screen shown below appears.  
LAST FAX DATA  
1:PRINT 2:CLEAR  
4 Press 2: CLEAR to erase the Last Fax Data from memory.  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD)  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables the use of a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
number used to call a phone with this feature is identified by a distinctive  
ringing pattern consisting of various combinations of long and short ringing  
tones.  
This feature is often used by answering services that answer telephones for  
many different clients and need to know which number is being called by  
the ringing pattern of the phone.  
4-8  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature (DRPD), this machine  
"learns" the ring pattern you designate to answer the fax.  
Unless changed, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and  
answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to  
the telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT. LINE jack. You  
can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection at any  
time. See Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
With the DRPD feature active, DRPD appears in the display and the  
previously set reception mode is ignored. If you turn DRPD off, the  
machine returns to any previously set reception mode.  
Polling  
What is Polling?  
Polling means that one fax machine requests another to send a document.  
This is useful for sending unattended faxes. The person, who wants to  
receive the document, calls the machine holding the original and requests  
the document. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding the original  
document.  
4
Polling One or More Remote Machines (RX POLL)  
You can set up the machine to automatically receive documents from  
unattended remote fax machines. The machine can be set up to receive the  
fax now, or at a later time. This feature permits unattended polling in off-  
peak hours when telephone rates are lower.  
Note: The remote machine must also support polling to use this feature.  
Polling  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature (DRPD), this machine  
"learns" the ring pattern you designate to answer the fax.  
Unless changed, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and  
answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to  
the telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT. LINE jack. You  
can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection at any  
time. See Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
With the DRPD feature active, DRPD appears in the display and the  
previously set reception mode is ignored. If you turn DRPD off, the  
machine returns to any previously set reception mode.  
Polling  
What is Polling?  
Polling means that one fax machine requests another to send a document.  
This is useful for sending unattended faxes. The person, who wants to  
receive the document, calls the machine holding the original and requests  
the document. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding the original  
document.  
4
Polling One or More Remote Machines (RX POLL)  
You can set up the machine to automatically receive documents from  
unattended remote fax machines. The machine can be set up to receive the  
fax now, or at a later time. This feature permits unattended polling in off-  
peak hours when telephone rates are lower.  
Note: The remote machine must also support polling to use this feature.  
Polling  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature (DRPD), this machine  
"learns" the ring pattern you designate to answer the fax.  
Unless changed, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and  
answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to  
the telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT. LINE jack. You  
can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection at any  
time. See Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
With the DRPD feature active, DRPD appears in the display and the  
previously set reception mode is ignored. If you turn DRPD off, the  
machine returns to any previously set reception mode.  
Polling  
What is Polling?  
Polling means that one fax machine requests another to send a document.  
This is useful for sending unattended faxes. The person, who wants to  
receive the document, calls the machine holding the original and requests  
the document. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding the original  
document.  
4
Polling One or More Remote Machines (RX POLL)  
You can set up the machine to automatically receive documents from  
unattended remote fax machines. The machine can be set up to receive the  
fax now, or at a later time. This feature permits unattended polling in off-  
peak hours when telephone rates are lower.  
Note: The remote machine must also support polling to use this feature.  
Polling  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Press the Menu button.  
2 Press the Polling button on the One-Touch keypad. The display shows  
the polling options:  
1. TX POLL  
2. DELAY RX POLL  
3 Press 2: DELAY RX POLL. The display asks you to enter the number  
of the remote fax machine.  
4 Enter the telephone number of the remote machine. There are several  
methods available to do this:  
Direct entry of the telephone number using the numeric keypad  
One-Touch keypad dialing of stored telephone numbers (see One-  
Touch Dialing on page 3-15)  
Speed Number dialing using the numeric keypad (see Speed  
Dialing on page 3-18)  
5 Press Enter.  
6 The display asks you to enter another fax number to receive documents  
from another location. If you want to receive documents from more  
than one location:  
a) Press the Enter button and enter another fax number using the  
numeric keypad, a One-Touch button, or two digit Speed Dial  
number.  
The number appears in the display. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to receive  
document from other locations.  
Or  
b) If you have entered the last fax number, press the Stop button.  
4-10  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 The display asks you to enter a name for the job. To assign a name to  
the polling job, enter the name. If a name is not desired, skip this step.  
8 Press the Enter button. The display asks you to enter a 4-digit poll  
code.  
9 If the remote machine is secured with a poll code, you must enter the  
correct code, and press the Enter button.  
Or  
If the remote machine is not secured with a poll code, press the Enter  
button to accept [0000] which represents no code.  
10 The display prompts for the time at which the machine will call and poll  
the remote machine. To call the remote machine immediately, skip over  
this step without entering a time for polling.  
Or  
If a specific time for polling is desired, enter the time. If you have  
configured your machine to use a 12-hour format, remember to specify  
A.M. or P.M.  
4
Note: If you set a time earlier than the current time, your machine calls the  
number at that time on the following day.  
11 Press the Enter button. If you did not enter a specific time for polling,  
the machine dials the remote machine immediately. If you entered a  
specific start time, the machine will call and poll the remote machine at  
that time.  
Polling  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC Fax Reception  
This section provides information and instructions for receiving faxes  
directly to a computer workstation connected to the WorkCentre 385. Using  
this method, a fax is received to the PC without printing it. This process is  
controlled by a PC Faxing application called LaserFAX Lite Version 3.5.  
What is LaserFAX Lite?  
LaserFAX Lite software is an application that is used to enable PC Faxing  
using the WorkCentre 385. If selected during the installation of the other  
software components for the WorkCentre 385, the LaserFAX Lite  
application is installed automatically.  
LaserFAX Installation  
To install LaserFAX Lite, no additional special hardware is required.  
Simply ensure that the WorkCentre 385 is connected to the computer  
workstation using the supplied IEEE 1284 parallel cable, and a phone line  
has also been connected to the Tel Line input on the back of the WorkCentre  
385.  
The system requirements and procedures for installing LaserFAX Lite  
software are contained in Chapter 1 - Getting Started. Refer to this chapter  
if LaserFAX Lite is not already installed on your computer workstation.  
4-12  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Receiving Faxes With LaserFAX  
LaserFAX Lite can be configured to receive faxes directly to a computer  
workstation, rather than having them print on the WorkCentre 385.  
To do this, perform the following steps:  
1 In the LaserFAX program group, select LaserFAX Config. The dialog  
shown below will be displayed:  
4
2 On this dialog, select the Edit Device button. This will cause the Edit  
Device Details dialog to be displayed. An example of this dialog is  
shown on the next page.  
PC Fax Reception  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 On this dialog, select the Receive Faxes to PC checkbox.  
4 Select OK.  
When a fax is received, an entry for the received fax will be displayed in the  
Received faxes list. Double click on the entry to view it. You can then  
decide whether to keep it, delete it, print it, or send it to another recipient.  
For a brief overview of LaserFAX application features, refer to LaserFAX  
Application Features on page 3-49.  
Note: If the WorkCentre 385 is not connected to the PC, or LaserFAX is  
not running, or the Receive to PC option is not selected, faxes will be  
printed on the WorkCentre 385.  
4-14  
Receiving a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: When LaserFAX Lite is running it is not possible to print or scan  
using the WorkCentre 385 if Receive faxes to PC is selected.  
If Receive Fax to PC is selected, to allow printing or scanning on the  
WorkCentre 385 you must shutdown LaserFAX Lite, or temporarily disable  
Receive Faxes to the PC by performing the following steps:  
1 Select the Display, Device information menu.  
2 Double click WC385 and de-select the Receive faxes to PC option.  
3 Click OK.  
4 Repeat this process to re-enable Receive Faxes to the PC later.  
Troubleshooting LaserFAX  
When LaserFAX does not activate, ensure that:  
The WorkCentre 385 is connected and plugged in.  
4
The parallel interface cable is properly connected and is not longer than  
6 feet.  
No error message is displayed on the WorkCentre 385. If an error  
message is displayed, check the Troubleshooting section of this manual  
to diagnose the problem.  
PC Fax Reception  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: When LaserFAX Lite is running it is not possible to print or scan  
using the WorkCentre 385 if Receive faxes to PC is selected.  
If Receive Fax to PC is selected, to allow printing or scanning on the  
WorkCentre 385 you must shutdown LaserFAX Lite, or temporarily disable  
Receive Faxes to the PC by performing the following steps:  
1 Select the Display, Device information menu.  
2 Double click WC385 and de-select the Receive faxes to PC option.  
3 Click OK.  
4 Repeat this process to re-enable Receive Faxes to the PC later.  
Troubleshooting LaserFAX  
When LaserFAX does not activate, ensure that:  
The WorkCentre 385 is connected and plugged in.  
4
The parallel interface cable is properly connected and is not longer than  
6 feet.  
No error message is displayed on the WorkCentre 385. If an error  
message is displayed, check the Troubleshooting section of this manual  
to diagnose the problem.  
PC Fax Reception  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing  
Chapter 5 Printing  
Printing a Document 5-1  
Printer Settings 5-2  
Accessing and Changing Printer Settings 5-3  
In Windows 3.x 5-3  
In Windows 95/98 5-8  
In Windows NT 4.0 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter5/chpt5.htm [07/09/1999 14:36:29]  
 
Chapter 5  
Printing  
Printing a Document  
This procedure describes the general steps required for printing from  
various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a document  
may vary depending on the application program you are using. Refer to  
your software application documentation for the exact printing procedure.  
1 Make sure that your machine is properly connected to the computer,  
and the On/Off Line LED indicator is lit (if it is not, press the On/Off  
Line button).  
5
2 Verify that you have installed the print driver software for your  
machine. See Installing Software on page 1-24.  
3 Create or open the document that you want to print.  
4 Choose Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Make sure the Xerox  
WorkCentre 385 is selected as your default printer.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Click on the Properties or Setup button if you want to make any  
adjustments that are appropriate for printing your document. (See  
Printer Settings on page 5-2.)  
6 Click on OK to close the Properties dialog box.  
7 After making any necessary changes to the printing parameters, click on  
OK to start the print job.  
8 If necessary, press the Print Priority button on the control panel of  
your Xerox WorkCentre 385 to assign first priority to the PC print job  
when the machine receives a fax.  
Printer Settings  
You can use your machine with all your Windows 3.x, Windows 95/98, or  
Windows NT applications. Be sure to set the Xerox WorkCentre 385 as the  
default printer for all your Windows operations.  
Most Windows software applications allow you to make changes to the  
printer settings. This includes settings that determine how a print job looks,  
such as page size, paper orientation, and margins. Settings made in the  
application to create the document will usually override settings made in the  
printer driver.  
The Xerox WorkCentre 385 printer driver includes the Printer Settings  
parameters described in the following section.  
5-2  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 Click on the Properties or Setup button if you want to make any  
adjustments that are appropriate for printing your document. (See  
Printer Settings on page 5-2.)  
6 Click on OK to close the Properties dialog box.  
7 After making any necessary changes to the printing parameters, click on  
OK to start the print job.  
8 If necessary, press the Print Priority button on the control panel of  
your Xerox WorkCentre 385 to assign first priority to the PC print job  
when the machine receives a fax.  
Printer Settings  
You can use your machine with all your Windows 3.x, Windows 95/98, or  
Windows NT applications. Be sure to set the Xerox WorkCentre 385 as the  
default printer for all your Windows operations.  
Most Windows software applications allow you to make changes to the  
printer settings. This includes settings that determine how a print job looks,  
such as page size, paper orientation, and margins. Settings made in the  
application to create the document will usually override settings made in the  
printer driver.  
The Xerox WorkCentre 385 printer driver includes the Printer Settings  
parameters described in the following section.  
5-2  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Accessing and Changing Printer Settings  
In Windows 3.x  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Open the Main Program Group from the Program Manager Window.  
Open the Control Panel Program Group. Open the Printers icon.  
Access the printing options from the Printers dialog box.  
Or  
Select the Print Setup... option available from the File menu of most  
applications that run in Windows.  
Or  
Select the Print... option available from the File menu of most  
applications that run in Windows, then select Printer in the Print  
dialog window, then select Options.  
From the Printer Setup window, you can review and change whatever  
settings are needed for your print job. The Printer Setup window consists  
of three tabs:  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
5
Printer Settings  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper/Output Tab  
The Paper Output tab is shown below.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or  
Landscape orientation for your print job.  
5-4  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box.  
Other Controls  
Each tab menu contains a row of buttons at the bottom of the window.  
These buttons are used as follows:  
Default All: Click on this button to change all printer settings to their  
default values.  
5
Defaults: Click on this button to change the currently selected printer  
settings to its default value.  
Help: Click on this button to display an on-line Help screen that  
provides more information about the printer settings.  
Printer Settings  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In addition, the Printer Setup Window contains a row of three buttons at the  
bottom of the window. These buttons are used as follows:  
OK: Click on this button to apply changes, and return to the Print  
dialog window.  
Cancel: Click on this button to immediately terminate the Printer  
Settings Tab Menu, and return to the Print dialog window. Any  
parameter changes that have not been applied are ignored.  
Apply: Click on this button to immediately apply any changes so they  
will not be ignored.  
Image Quality Tab  
The Image Quality tab is shown below:  
5-6  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to save toner when you are printing. This results in  
a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box again.  
About Tab  
This tab shows product version information.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Windows 95/98  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Select the Print or Print Setup command from within any Windows  
application. This method will provide access to the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, and then select the  
Properties command from the File menu. This method will provide  
access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, click the right mouse button,  
and then select Properties from the drop-down list. This method will  
provide access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/  
Output, Image Quality and About tabs only.  
When you see the Printer Properties displayed, you can then review and  
change whatever settings are needed for your print job. If accessed through  
the Printers folder, the Printer Properties consists of five tabs:  
General Tab - for viewing and changing general Windows 95 printer  
information (see your Windows 95/98 User Guide for details).  
Details Tab - for viewing and changing port and timeout parameters  
(see your Windows 95/98 User Guide for details)  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
5-8  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Output Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the Down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or Landscape  
orientation for your print job.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box. A value of 100 will result in printing your job the same size as  
the original document.  
5-10  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to enable toner saving for your printer. This results  
in a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box  
again.  
About Tab  
This tab shows the software version information.  
5-12  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Windows NT 4.0  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Select the Print or Print Setup command from within any Windows  
application. This method will provide access to the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, and then select the  
Properties command from the File menu. This method will provide  
access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, click the right mouse button,  
and then select Properties from the drop-down list. This method will  
provide access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/  
Output, Image Quality and About tabs.  
When you see the Printer Properties displayed, you can then review and  
change whatever settings are needed for your print job. If accessed through  
the Printers folder, the Printer Properties consists of four tabs:  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
5
Advanced Tab - for advanced printer settings  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
Printer Settings  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Output Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any settings made  
will become the default settings for the printer. Settings made when the  
printer properties are accessed through an application File menu and Print  
or Print Setup will remain active until the application you are printing from is  
closed.  
5-14  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the Down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or Landscape  
orientation for your print job.  
5
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box. A value of 100 will result in printing your job the same size as  
the original document.  
Printer Settings  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any settings made  
will become the default settings for the printer. Settings made when the  
printer properties are accessed through an application File menu and Print  
or Print Setup will remain active until the application you are printing from is  
closed.  
5-16  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to enable toner saving for your printer. This results  
in a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box  
again.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Tab  
Overview  
The Advanced Tab provides options to accommodate software applications  
that interface with printer drivers in non-standard ways. Most users need  
never access these options. However, if a particular document is not  
printing satisfactorily, you can try altering these settings to improve the  
printed output.  
5-18  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To get best performance for  
Color Document  
Some applications do not recognize the capabilities of your printer to  
interpret color images as shades of gray. For these applications, the Color  
Document option exists. For example, this option should be checked when  
printing from Microsoft PowerPoint.  
If correct gray tones are not being printed from an application, try changing  
this option. Click on the checkbox to enable the Color Document option.  
Graphics  
This selection enables special instruction codes developed by Micrografx.  
This set of codes can provide substantial performance gains when printing  
complex graphics from some software applications. For example, Lotus  
Freelance for Windows and most Micrografx software either requires or  
works better with this option checked.  
In general, if performance when rendering complex graphics is either very  
slow, or yields unsatisfactory output, you should try changing this setting.  
Click on the checkbox to enable the Graphics option.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gray output of color text  
Dither Text  
The WorkCentre 385 relies on dithering to achieve shades of gray. With the  
Dither Text option checked (the default), the WorkCentre 385 provides  
accurate grays even if it has to dither them.  
However, small dithered text is difficult to read. With the Dither Text option  
not checked, your printer maps text and lines to the nearest gray. For black  
& white output, the grays that are darker than about 50% map to black;  
while lighter grays map to white. For color output, colors map to the nearest  
gray.  
If you are getting poor results from small gray or colored text, try changing  
the setting of this option.  
Dither Lines  
The WorkCentre 385 relies on dithering to achieve shades of gray. With the  
Dither Lines option checked (the default), the WorkCentre 385 prints  
accurate grays even if it has to dither them.  
However, fine dithered lines appear dashed instead of solid. With the Dither  
Lines option not checked, your printer maps text and lines to the nearest  
gray. For black & white output, the grays that are darker than about 50%  
map to black; while lighter grays map to white. For color output, colors map  
to the nearest gray.  
If you are getting poor results from thin gray or colored lines, try changing  
the setting of this option.  
5-20  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Fill Patterns  
Accept Larger Bitmap Pattern  
When an application sends a bitmap fill pattern (also called a "pattern  
brush") to the printer, the standard size is 8 pixels x 8 pixels. Some  
applications are able to send larger patterns.  
If Accept Larger Bitmap Pattern is checked, and bitmap fill patterns print  
incorrectly, for example too small or too dark, try changing the setting.  
Scale  
The WorkCentre 385 uses a process that automatically enlarges the bitmap  
fill patterns so that the output more closely matches the screen. For  
example, with the default, "automatic" setting of Scale: 0, patterns that  
come from a VGA system (96x96 logical pixels per inch) are enlarged three  
times to nearly match the 300x300 dpi output of a laser printer.  
If you set Scale to 1, the printer will handle the brush patterns exactly as  
they come from the application -- no scaling. You can also force the printer  
to scale by 2, 3, 4, or more times by entering larger numbers.  
If the pattern filled areas in your printed output does not closely match the  
screen display, try changing this setting.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font  
TrueType  
When the TrueType option is checked, TrueType fonts are sent as text. This  
may result in faster printing.  
When the TrueType option is not checked, fonts are handled as graphics.  
This can be useful if you are printing over a network to a print server that  
does not have the same typeface you are using on your workstation PC.  
Since the data is sent as graphics, you do not run into font substitution  
problems.  
If your text printing results are satisfactory, you should ignore these  
settings.  
Note: If you are printing with characters found in languages like Japanese  
or Chinese (also called double-byte characters), the TrueType checkbox  
should be off.  
Adobe Type Manager  
When the Adobe Type Manager (ATM) option is checked, the printer driver  
accesses a "back door" to the Adobe Type Manager. This may speed up  
printing of Type 1 PostScript fonts by handling them as text.  
When the Adobe Type Manager option is not checked, fonts are handled as  
graphics.  
About Tab  
This tab shows the software version information.  
5-22  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing and Changing Printer Settings  
In Windows 3.x  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Open the Main Program Group from the Program Manager Window.  
Open the Control Panel Program Group. Open the Printers icon.  
Access the printing options from the Printers dialog box.  
Or  
Select the Print Setup... option available from the File menu of most  
applications that run in Windows.  
Or  
Select the Print... option available from the File menu of most  
applications that run in Windows, then select Printer in the Print  
dialog window, then select Options.  
From the Printer Setup window, you can review and change whatever  
settings are needed for your print job. The Printer Setup window consists  
of three tabs:  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
5
Printer Settings  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper/Output Tab  
The Paper Output tab is shown below.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or  
Landscape orientation for your print job.  
5-4  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box.  
Other Controls  
Each tab menu contains a row of buttons at the bottom of the window.  
These buttons are used as follows:  
Default All: Click on this button to change all printer settings to their  
default values.  
5
Defaults: Click on this button to change the currently selected printer  
settings to its default value.  
Help: Click on this button to display an on-line Help screen that  
provides more information about the printer settings.  
Printer Settings  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In addition, the Printer Setup Window contains a row of three buttons at the  
bottom of the window. These buttons are used as follows:  
OK: Click on this button to apply changes, and return to the Print  
dialog window.  
Cancel: Click on this button to immediately terminate the Printer  
Settings Tab Menu, and return to the Print dialog window. Any  
parameter changes that have not been applied are ignored.  
Apply: Click on this button to immediately apply any changes so they  
will not be ignored.  
Image Quality Tab  
The Image Quality tab is shown below:  
5-6  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to save toner when you are printing. This results in  
a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box again.  
About Tab  
This tab shows product version information.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Windows 95/98  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Select the Print or Print Setup command from within any Windows  
application. This method will provide access to the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, and then select the  
Properties command from the File menu. This method will provide  
access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, click the right mouse button,  
and then select Properties from the drop-down list. This method will  
provide access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/  
Output, Image Quality and About tabs only.  
When you see the Printer Properties displayed, you can then review and  
change whatever settings are needed for your print job. If accessed through  
the Printers folder, the Printer Properties consists of five tabs:  
General Tab - for viewing and changing general Windows 95 printer  
information (see your Windows 95/98 User Guide for details).  
Details Tab - for viewing and changing port and timeout parameters  
(see your Windows 95/98 User Guide for details)  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
5-8  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Output Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the Down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or Landscape  
orientation for your print job.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box. A value of 100 will result in printing your job the same size as  
the original document.  
5-10  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to enable toner saving for your printer. This results  
in a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box  
again.  
About Tab  
This tab shows the software version information.  
5-12  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In Windows NT 4.0  
You can access printer settings by using any of these methods:  
Select the Print or Print Setup command from within any Windows  
application. This method will provide access to the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs only.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, and then select the  
Properties command from the File menu. This method will provide  
access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/Output,  
Image Quality and About tabs.  
Or  
Select the printer from the Printers folder, click the right mouse button,  
and then select Properties from the drop-down list. This method will  
provide access to the General and Details tabs, as well as the Paper/  
Output, Image Quality and About tabs.  
When you see the Printer Properties displayed, you can then review and  
change whatever settings are needed for your print job. If accessed through  
the Printers folder, the Printer Properties consists of four tabs:  
Paper/Output Tab - for paper sources and sizes, number of copies, etc.  
Image Quality Tab - for image quality  
5
Advanced Tab - for advanced printer settings  
About Tab - for product identification and information  
Printer Settings  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Output Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any settings made  
will become the default settings for the printer. Settings made when the  
printer properties are accessed through an application File menu and Print  
or Print Setup will remain active until the application you are printing from is  
closed.  
5-14  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the Down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or Landscape  
orientation for your print job.  
5
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box. A value of 100 will result in printing your job the same size as  
the original document.  
Printer Settings  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image Quality Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any settings made  
will become the default settings for the printer. Settings made when the  
printer properties are accessed through an application File menu and Print  
or Print Setup will remain active until the application you are printing from is  
closed.  
5-16  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either 300 dpi or 600 dpi  
print resolution for your print job.  
Toner Saver  
Click on the check box to enable toner saving for your printer. This results  
in a lighter printed image. To disable this option, click on the check box  
again.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Tab  
Overview  
The Advanced Tab provides options to accommodate software applications  
that interface with printer drivers in non-standard ways. Most users need  
never access these options. However, if a particular document is not  
printing satisfactorily, you can try altering these settings to improve the  
printed output.  
5-18  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To get best performance for  
Color Document  
Some applications do not recognize the capabilities of your printer to  
interpret color images as shades of gray. For these applications, the Color  
Document option exists. For example, this option should be checked when  
printing from Microsoft PowerPoint.  
If correct gray tones are not being printed from an application, try changing  
this option. Click on the checkbox to enable the Color Document option.  
Graphics  
This selection enables special instruction codes developed by Micrografx.  
This set of codes can provide substantial performance gains when printing  
complex graphics from some software applications. For example, Lotus  
Freelance for Windows and most Micrografx software either requires or  
works better with this option checked.  
In general, if performance when rendering complex graphics is either very  
slow, or yields unsatisfactory output, you should try changing this setting.  
Click on the checkbox to enable the Graphics option.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gray output of color text  
Dither Text  
The WorkCentre 385 relies on dithering to achieve shades of gray. With the  
Dither Text option checked (the default), the WorkCentre 385 provides  
accurate grays even if it has to dither them.  
However, small dithered text is difficult to read. With the Dither Text option  
not checked, your printer maps text and lines to the nearest gray. For black  
& white output, the grays that are darker than about 50% map to black;  
while lighter grays map to white. For color output, colors map to the nearest  
gray.  
If you are getting poor results from small gray or colored text, try changing  
the setting of this option.  
Dither Lines  
The WorkCentre 385 relies on dithering to achieve shades of gray. With the  
Dither Lines option checked (the default), the WorkCentre 385 prints  
accurate grays even if it has to dither them.  
However, fine dithered lines appear dashed instead of solid. With the Dither  
Lines option not checked, your printer maps text and lines to the nearest  
gray. For black & white output, the grays that are darker than about 50%  
map to black; while lighter grays map to white. For color output, colors map  
to the nearest gray.  
If you are getting poor results from thin gray or colored lines, try changing  
the setting of this option.  
5-20  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Fill Patterns  
Accept Larger Bitmap Pattern  
When an application sends a bitmap fill pattern (also called a "pattern  
brush") to the printer, the standard size is 8 pixels x 8 pixels. Some  
applications are able to send larger patterns.  
If Accept Larger Bitmap Pattern is checked, and bitmap fill patterns print  
incorrectly, for example too small or too dark, try changing the setting.  
Scale  
The WorkCentre 385 uses a process that automatically enlarges the bitmap  
fill patterns so that the output more closely matches the screen. For  
example, with the default, "automatic" setting of Scale: 0, patterns that  
come from a VGA system (96x96 logical pixels per inch) are enlarged three  
times to nearly match the 300x300 dpi output of a laser printer.  
If you set Scale to 1, the printer will handle the brush patterns exactly as  
they come from the application -- no scaling. You can also force the printer  
to scale by 2, 3, 4, or more times by entering larger numbers.  
If the pattern filled areas in your printed output does not closely match the  
screen display, try changing this setting.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Font  
TrueType  
When the TrueType option is checked, TrueType fonts are sent as text. This  
may result in faster printing.  
When the TrueType option is not checked, fonts are handled as graphics.  
This can be useful if you are printing over a network to a print server that  
does not have the same typeface you are using on your workstation PC.  
Since the data is sent as graphics, you do not run into font substitution  
problems.  
If your text printing results are satisfactory, you should ignore these  
settings.  
Note: If you are printing with characters found in languages like Japanese  
or Chinese (also called double-byte characters), the TrueType checkbox  
should be off.  
Adobe Type Manager  
When the Adobe Type Manager (ATM) option is checked, the printer driver  
accesses a "back door" to the Adobe Type Manager. This may speed up  
printing of Type 1 PostScript fonts by handling them as text.  
When the Adobe Type Manager option is not checked, fonts are handled as  
graphics.  
About Tab  
This tab shows the software version information.  
5-22  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning  
Chapter 6 Scanning  
Overview 6-1  
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Program 6-2  
Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Application 6-3  
The WorkCentre 385 Twain Scanner Window 6-7  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Help 6-8  
Scanner Control Tabs 6-9  
The Basic Tab 6-10  
The Image Quality Tab 6-19  
The Filters Tab 6-30  
Preview Window 6-34  
Image Control Tools 6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter6/chpt6.htm [07/09/1999 14:37:07]  
 
Chapter 6  
Scanning  
Overview  
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Program is an image-scanning  
program that operates under various image-editing and OCR applications.  
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Program includes drivers which may  
be used with any TWAIN-compliant application software. The scanner  
program software will operate the WorkCentre 385 black and white scanner.  
The TWAIN standard is an image data transfer protocol developed to allow  
one software package to use many devices. Some examples of TWAIN  
compliant devices are: flat-bed scanners, drum scanners, digital cameras,  
and video frame grabbers.  
The TWAIN standard also allows many software packages access to the  
same image input device. Examples of some TWAIN-compliant software  
packages are: ScanSoft Pagis SE, TextBridge and Adobe Photoshop.  
TextBridge is provided with your WorkCentre 385.  
6
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Program  
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Program provides an impressive  
array of scanning controls and previewing options:  
Monitor rendering capabilities  
Descreen  
Flip and rotate  
Inversion of images  
A variety of filters  
Control brightness  
Gamma correction  
Reduction or magnification of images, and more.  
To access these features, the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window  
below opens when Acquire (or similar selection) is selected from the File  
menu of a TWAIN compliant image editing application.  
6-2  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
With this array of image previewing and scanning functions, you can see the  
results of the changes you made to an image, before you save the images  
you create.  
Note: Your WorkCentre 385 can scan in black/white and grayscale only.  
Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner  
Application  
Note: To install the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application, refer to  
Installing Software in the Getting Started section of this manual.  
To use the WC 385 as a scanner, the following are required:  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application installed on the  
workstation connected to the WC 385.  
A TWAIN compliant image editing software application (for example,  
ScanSoft Pagis SE, TextBridge, or Adobe Photoshop).  
The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window will be displayed when you  
choose the WC 385 to scan documents or photographs from the TWAIN  
compliant image editing application.  
6
Overview  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To start the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application:  
Note: To start the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application from  
TextBridge Pro, refer to Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner  
Application from TextBridge Pro below.  
1 Plug in the WC 385 and switch on your PC.  
2 Start Windows.  
3 Start/Open the TWAIN-compliant image-editing application.  
4 In most programs, choose the Select Source option from the File menu.  
5 Select 385Scan in the Select Source dialog box.  
6 Open the File menu, and select the Acquire option. The WorkCentre  
385 TWAIN Scanner window will appear (see The WorkCentre 385  
Twain Scanner Window on page 6-7).  
7 When the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window appears, you can  
select the appropriate scan options for the document or photograph to  
be scanned.  
After adjusting the settings in the Scan window, you can perform a  
preliminary preview scan of the image before performing a final scan.  
To launch a preview scan:  
a) Load the document to be scanned in the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
b) Click the Prescan button.  
The WorkCentre 385 scans the image and a preview appears in the  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window.  
6-4  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Adjust the scan options as desired before initiating the final scan.  
9 Reload the document back into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
10 Click the Scan button.  
11 The document is scanned by the WorkCentre 385 and the updated  
image is displayed in the TWAIN compliant application.  
Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application from  
TextBridge Pro  
1 From the File menu, click on Select Scanner. A list of supported  
scanners will be displayed.  
2 From the list, select Xerox WorkCentre 385 (TWAIN). Click OK.  
3 From the TextBridge Pro Process menu, select Get Page. A Page Type  
dialog will be displayed.  
4 Select the desired page type and select Scanner as the Page Source.  
Click OK.  
5 The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application is displayed. Select  
the appropriate scan options for the document or photograph to be  
scanned.  
After adjusting the settings in the Scan window, you can perform a  
preliminary preview scan of the image before performing a final scan.  
To launch a preview scan:  
a) Load the document to be scanned in the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
6
b) Click the Prescan button.  
The WorkCentre 385 scans the image and a preview appears in the  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window.  
Overview  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Adjust the scan options as desired before initiating the final scan.  
7 Reload the document back into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
8 Click the Scan button.  
9 The document is scanned by the WorkCentre 385 and the updated  
image is displayed in TextBridge Pro.  
6-6  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The WorkCentre 385 Twain Scanner Window  
The 385Scan Window is used to view and modify the scanned image.  
Using the features of this window, various image processing options can be  
applied to the scanned image.  
Scanner Control Tabs  
For more information,  
see page 6-9.  
Preview window  
For details on the tools in  
the Preview windows, see  
page 6-34.  
6
Overview  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner Help  
You can refer to the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application on-line  
help for assistance. To access on-line help, move the cursor over the feature  
of the window that help is desired for. A yellow popup dialog box will  
appear. Click on the dialog box to access on-line help.  
On-line Help contains information about using the menus and commands of  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application. Use Help anytime you need  
information on the use of a particular menu or command.  
6-8  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanner Control Tabs  
You can adjust the settings for the document or photograph to be scanned  
prior to capturing the image using the features of the Scanner Control Tabs.  
Scanner  
Control Tabs  
Each of these tabs is described in detail in the following sections of this  
User Guide:  
The Basic Tab see page 6-10.  
6
The Image Quality Tab see page 6-19.  
The Filters Tab see page 6-30.  
The About Tab indicates the version of the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN  
Scanning application.  
Overview  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Basic Tab  
The features of the Basic Tab are described in this section. All of the  
features of this tab are available when the Gray 256 Scales selection is made  
for Image Type. Refer to the table below which indicates the tab features  
that are available for the Lineart B/W and Halftone B/W Image Type  
selections.  
Gray 256 Scales Lineart B/W  
Halftone B/W  
Image Type  
Resolution  
Available  
Available  
Available  
All selections  
available  
300, 200, and  
150 dpi  
300, 200, and  
150 dpi  
selections only  
available  
selections only  
available  
Reduce/Enlarge Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Descreen  
Available  
Image Type  
This menu specifies the mode in which the image is to be scanned. Each of  
the selections available are explained in detail below.  
The following examples of the scan modes illustrate possible output for the  
scanned image.  
6-10  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gray 256 Scales  
Halftone B/W  
Lineart B/W  
Gray 256 Scales  
Images scanned in Gray 256 Scales mode are scanned in 256 shades of gray.  
If high quality copies of photographs or other continuous tone originals are  
desired, Gray 256 Shades mode is the best choice.  
Gray 256 Scales provides accurate representation of black and white, and  
intermediate gray shades between black and white, for each individual  
pixel. It actually provides 256 shades, representing white by the value 255  
and black by the value zero, with progressively lighter intermediate shades  
of gray by values from 1 through 254.  
Halftone B/W  
This scan mode uses various combinations of black and white pixels to  
simulate gray scales. While not the same level of image quality as the Gray  
256 Scales image type, this image type is good for continuous tone images  
where smaller file size is more important than ideal image quality.  
In this scan mode, each pixel of the image has two possible states: on  
(black) or off (white). This means that each pixel can be represented by 1  
bit. For this reason, the file size is much smaller than that of a document  
scanned in the Gray 256 Scales mode, which uses 8 bits to define 256  
shades of gray.  
6
Overview  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lineart B/W  
Lineart B/W mode is generally the best choice for printed text or pen-and-  
ink drawings.  
Like the Halftone B/W image type, this image type defines the state of each  
pixel in the image with one bit that is either on or off.  
For this reason, files created in this mode will require approximately the  
same amount of disk space as a Halftone B/W file.  
Note: In both Halftone and Lineart modes, the resolution can only be set at  
150, 200, or 300 dpi.  
6-12  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution  
The resolution setting determines the amount of information the scanner  
will capture in a scanned image.  
Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch). The higher the resolution is,  
the finer the image detail and the bigger the image file size is. Increasing  
the resolution will result in corresponding increases in image detail and  
image file size. See the examples of images at 75 and 300 dpi.  
6
300 dpi  
75 dpi  
Overview  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can select any one of the resolution settings shown on the Resolution  
menu, or specify your own resolution by selecting the Custom option  
which invokes the Custom Resolution dialog box.  
Using the Custom Resolution dialog box, three custom resolution settings  
can be made. These three settings can then be displayed and selected from  
the Resolution menu.  
To use the Custom Resolution dialog box:  
1 Type the desired resolution (in dpi)  
2 Click OK.  
3 The custom resolution created will then be displayed in the Resolution  
menu.  
Note: The Resolution settings can be restored by clicking Defaults at the  
bottom of the Basic tab.  
6-14  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
This feature allows an image to be automatically enlarged or reduced as it is  
scanned. The default scaling factor is 100%. The selected scaling factor, the  
range of which is dependent on the selected image type, affects the printed  
scan output.  
Note: When scanning a printed image for screen display only, scale the  
image down to increase processing speed and decrease the file size.  
6
Overview  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scaling 50%  
Scaling 100%  
Fixed scaling options are displayed as percentages of reduction or  
enlargement. Image width and height are scaled proportionally when fixed  
scaling factors are used. To scale to a size other than the fixed sizes, select  
the Custom option in the Scaling menu. The Custom Scaling dialog box will  
appear.  
To change the Height or Width text box values:  
1 Insert the desired height and width values into the Height and Width  
text boxes.  
2 The units of measurement may be changed to inches, centimeters,  
millimeters, pixels, picas, or percentages of the original image  
dimensions by selecting the desired unit of measurement from the Units  
drop-down list boxes to the right of the Height and Width text boxes.  
3 To prevent distortion of the image when changing height and width  
values, the height and width values are automatically linked–you need  
only enter one value, either a Height or Width value. The other value  
will be computed and the image will resize proportionately.  
6-16  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: You can also change Height and Width values by directly adjusting  
the selection frame.  
Note: Output image file size is proportional to both Height and Width.  
If both Height and Width values are doubled, then the image area and  
image file size will increase four-fold.  
Note: Once you have confirmed or changed the size, resolution, and final  
scan boundary settings, the scanning software determines the size of the  
resulting scanned image and displays this information along with available  
hard disk space.  
Descreen  
This selection is used to eliminate moire patterns from the output image.  
Moire occurs as a result of differences in the screen pattern used to print the  
document and the scanner electronics. Moire may appear as checkered  
patterns bands or dots. Descreen preprocessing can minimize the transfer of  
moire patterns into your image file.  
6
Overview  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Besides a default setting of No Descreen, the Descreen selector provides  
three grades of descreen preprocessing as described below.  
No Descreen  
No descreening.  
Art print (175 lpi)  
The Art print selection is used to smooth the fine dot pattern found in high  
quality art prints and magazines made in a resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Magazine (133 lpi)  
The Magazine selection is used to smooth the fine dot pattern found in  
glossy magazines made in the resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Newspaper (85 lpi)  
The Newspaper selection smooths the coarse grain pattern commonly found  
in newspaper images made in a resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Note: The preview display is not affected by the Descreen option. In order  
to see the results of Descreen process, it is always necessary to scan the  
image, and examine the output image on the workstation display.  
6-18  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Image Quality Tab  
The features of the Image Quality tab are described below. All of the  
features of this tab are available when the Gray 256 Scales selection is made  
for Image Type. Refer to the table below which indicates the tab features  
that are available for the Lineart B/W and Halftone B/W Image Type  
selections.  
Gray 256 Scales Lineart B/W  
Halftone B/W  
Color Channel  
Selection  
Gray Channel Only  
Gray Channel  
Only  
Gray Channel  
Only  
Highlight  
Control  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Shadow  
Control  
Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Midtone  
Control  
Available  
Advanced  
Features  
Available  
6
Overview  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Color Channel  
The Color Channel radio buttons are used to specify the color channel in  
which to change the Highlight, Shadow and Midtone values.  
The only channel available to be selected when using the WorkCentre 385  
to scan is the Gray channel. Red, Green and Blue are used for scanners  
capable of scanning documents in color.  
Highlight  
The Highlight value represents the lightest value in an image. All pixels  
above this point will be rendered as pure white. If you subsequently broaden  
the highlight points on the Level Adjustment graph, the pixels will be re-  
mapped within the new range, thus allowing you to see more detail in the  
image.  
6-20  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Highlight scroll bar allows you to manually set a highlight level. The  
default for the Highlight settings is 255. You can increase or decrease the  
highlights in a particular image as needed by adjusting this scroll bar. The  
value in the adjacent box will change in the range 1 to 255 as the slider  
moves.  
Shadow  
The Shadow value represents the darkest value in an image. All pixels  
below this point will be rendered as pure black. If you subsequently broaden  
the shadow points on the Level Adjustment graph, the pixels will be re-  
mapped within the new range thus allowing you to see more detail in the  
image.  
The default value for Shadow is 0. You can increase or decrease the  
shadows in a particular image as needed by adjusting this scroll bar.  
Midtone  
All optical devices such as monitors and scanners have some differences in  
their light sensitivity characteristics. 385Scan provides Midtone adjustment  
for you to compensate for these differences in your scanner, and it produces  
better scanned images.  
6
Overview  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change the Midtone value, move the Slider to the left or right to change  
the values in the adjacent text box. The value in the adjacent box will  
change in the range 0.1 to 10.0 as the slider moves.  
Ordinarily, good results can be obtained from your machine by leaving the  
slider at its default value of 1.00.  
The Advanced Selection  
The Advanced selection will present features that allow you to modify the  
Level Adjustment and Tonal Map of the document.  
For both the Level Adjustment and the Tonal Map functions, the window  
displayed contains small representations, known as thumbnail views, of the  
original and enhanced images (Samples 1 and 2).  
To activate the Level Adjustment or Tonal Map functions, click on the  
Advanced... button at the bottom of the Image Quality tab.  
The Advanced... button  
When this button is selected, the Level Adjustment window is displayed by  
default.  
6-22  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Level Adjustment  
The Level Adjustment dialog box shows the distribution of brightness  
levels in your image. To adjust the histogram plot, drag the triangles  
located below the horizontal bar to the desired values. The left (black)  
triangle changes the shadow levels. The right (white) triangle changes the  
highlight levels. The middle (gray) triangle controls the midtone levels.  
Level  
Adjustment  
tab  
Shadow  
control  
Highlight control  
Midtone (Gamma)  
control  
By varying the Shadow points and Highlight points you can change the  
relative shades and highlights of the image. The Shadow point represents  
the darkest value and the Highlight point is the brightest value.  
6
Overview  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Midtone point represents the Gamma setting for your particular screen.  
On the histogram, the Shadow and Highlight scales are divided into 255  
units.  
Therefore, all pixels in the original that are darker than the current shadow  
point are now completely black in the enhanced image. Conversely, all  
pixels in the original that are brighter than the current highlight point are  
now completely white in the processed image.  
Setting the highlight point to 200 renders all pixels greater than or equal to  
200, on the original, completely white in the processed image. Similarly  
setting the Shadow point to 200 renders all points less than or equal to 200,  
on the original, completely black in the enhanced image. Photographers  
often refer to these effects as "high-key" or "low-key". High-key is an  
image pushed to the white end, and low-key is an image pushed to the black  
end of the tone curve.  
The Midtone is a relative measure of the gamma of your monitor. The scale  
for Midtone ranges from 0 to 255. The gamma curve is on a geometric  
series. This means that at a value of 255 it tends to infinity.  
The Midtone is bound by the Shadow and Highlight terms and cannot  
exceed them at any time. So, if the Highlight is set to 255 and the Shadow  
is set to 0, a gamma of 1 is equal to a Midtone of 128. Similarly, if the  
Shadow is set at 200 (lower boundary) and the Highlight is set at 220 (upper  
boundary), a gamma of 1 is equal to a Midtone of 210.  
6-24  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation:  
1 Select the Advanced... button on the Image Quality tab. This will  
display the Level Adjustment window.  
2 On the histogram, use the mouse key to click on the Black, Gray, or  
White triangles to make changes to the Shadow, Midtone, and Highlight  
respectively.  
3 To see the changes and compare them to the original previewed image,  
click on Sample 1 to see the enhanced image.  
4 To make a second enhancement for comparison, click on Sample 2.  
Make new enhancements to the original. Compare the images of  
Samples 1 and 2.  
5 After completing enhancement settings, click on the desired sample to  
choose the image.  
6 Click OK to save the changes and close the Enhancement dialog box.  
If you do not want to save the changes, click on the Cancel button to  
and close the Enhancement dialog box. Click the Auto button to allow  
the software to make appropriate highlight and shadow adjustments.  
6
Overview  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tonal Map  
If you select the Tonal Map tab, the following will be displayed.  
Tonal Map  
tab  
The Tonal Map is yet another way to adjust Highlight, Midtone, or Shadow  
levels in your images. When you open the Tonal Map dialog box, a tonal  
map consisting of a diagonally straight line appears. Notice that at every  
point on the default tonal map, the output shadow, midtone, and highlight  
brightness levels are equal to the input shadow, midtone, and highlight  
brightness levels.  
6-26  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The shape and slant of the tonal map represent brightness level ratios  
between the input of the original image and the output image data. By  
clicking on the tonal map line, a hand-shaped cursor will appear which can  
be dragged to change the shape of the tonal map line.  
The horizontal axis represents the original input brightness and the vertical  
axis represents the enhanced brightness. Values on either scale range from 0  
to 255.  
As shown in the figure below, if the curve is changed into a convex shape  
above the original diagonal, the enhanced image will be brighter than the  
original.  
Normal  
Image  
Lightened  
Image  
6
Overview  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the curve is changed into a concave shape below the original diagonal, the  
enhanced image will be darker than the original.  
Normal  
Image  
Darkened  
Image  
Operation:  
1 Click on the Tonal Map icon in the Preview window or the Tonal Map  
tab in the Enhancement dialog box. Tonal Map dialog box will  
appear.  
2 Click on the Tonal Map curve, an indicator appears which can then be  
dragged to change the shape of the curve.  
a) If a previously saved Tonal Map is desired, select the Load button.  
An Open dialog box appears for you to open the desired file.  
6-28  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b) Or, click on the Reset button to return the Tonal Map to the  
default diagonal as in the original.  
c) Click the Save button to save the changes as a customized setting.  
A Save As dialog box will appear upon selection of this button.  
Enter the name for the customized curve and click on the OK  
button.  
3 Select the Histogram button to see a histogram of the changes made.  
4 Select the OK button to accept all the changes or the Cancel button to  
abandon all unsaved changes.  
6
Overview  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Filters Tab  
The features of the Filters Tab are described below, and are used to apply  
various visual modifications to the scanned image. All of the features of  
this tab are available when the Gray 256 Scales selection is made for Image  
Type. Refer to the table below which indicates the tab features that are  
available for the Lineart B/W and Halftone B/W Image Type selections.  
Gray 256 Scales Lineart B/W  
Halftone B/W  
Sharpness  
Control  
Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Rotate Control  
Available  
Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Not Available  
Flip Image  
Control  
Invert Image  
Control  
Available  
Available  
Available  
Filter  
Filter is typically useful for high-contrast images which soften or sharpen  
edges and boundaries of an image.  
6-30  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
No Filter  
This is the default filter option. No filtering will take place when using this  
option.  
Sharpen  
This selection emphasizes the edges of an image. It sharpens the image  
boundaries by increasing the relative contrast between adjacent pixels. In  
general, sharpen filters should only be used when you want to accentuate  
the differences between one area and another.  
Sharpen More  
This option further emphasizes the edges of an image. This option produces  
a much stronger contrast than the Sharpen option.  
Blur  
This selection softens the image by smoothing out any sharp transitions in  
intensity between two adjacent pixels.  
Blur More  
This option further softens the image by performing the same function as  
the Blur option, but to a greater extent.  
Note: If you blur the image too much, you will risk losing texture and depth  
in the image.  
6
Overview  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotate Image  
This selection provides the ability to rotate an image. The rotation  
mechanism rotates an image clockwise in 90º increments.  
Flip Image  
This selection provides the ability to flip an image. The flipping  
mechanism flips an image about the horizontal or vertical axis.  
6-32  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Invert Image  
This function inverts all the tone values, providing a photographic negative  
of the original. This effect is similar to using the Tonal Map to tonally  
invert the image.  
6
Overview  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preview Window  
After adjusting the settings in the Scanner Control window, choose any one  
of the tools in the Preview Window to further enhance the image. The  
following is detailed information about the tools available in the Preview  
Window.  
Image Control Tools.  
For information, see  
page 6-35.  
Preview Window. Used  
to view the Prescanned  
document. Some  
changes made to the  
document are seen here.  
Prescan and Scan  
buttons. For information,  
see page 6-38.  
6-34  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Image Control Tools  
The Image Control Tools are used to control the image displayed in the  
Preview Window. The functions of these tools are described below.  
Frame Tool  
After a preview image has been created, you can define the boundaries of  
the area to be included in your final scan by using the Frame tool.  
Use the Frame tool to select a rectangular portion (selection frame) of the  
preview screen, or select the entire preview screen, for the final scan  
boundaries. When you select the Scan button, only the area within the  
selection frame will be included in the final scan.  
To use the Frame tool:  
1 Select the Frame tool by clicking the Frame tool icon.  
2 Drag the cursor to the preview area and release the mouse button when  
the selection frame is in the desired position.  
3 To adjust the selection frame size or shape, drag any edge or corner of  
the frame in or out. Alternatively, hold down the Shift key and the  
mouse key on one of the sides of the frame and then move the cursor  
accordingly. This action will contract or expand the entire frame.  
6
Overview  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 To move the selection frame to a different area of the image without  
changing its size or shape, place the cursor within the selection frame  
and drag it to the desired location.  
5 To create an entirely new selection frame, place the cursor outside the  
existing selection frame and drag diagonally. The first selection frame  
will disappear while the second one remains.  
Note: If you hold down the Shift key and drag the mouse diagonally, the  
sides of the selection frame will resize proportionally.  
Zoom In and Out Tools  
The Zoom In and Out tools allow you to zoom in or out on an image within  
the Preview window; zooming in (the + sign appears on the zoom cursor)  
enlarges the view of the active image so that you can work on small details  
in an image. Zooming out (the - sign appears on the zoom cursor) reduces  
the view of the active image.  
To use the Zoom In tool:  
1 Select the Zoom tool by clicking the Zoom In tool icon.  
2 Drag the cursor to the preview area. The cursor will change to a  
magnifying glass whenever it is in the preview space.  
6-36  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Zoom in (magnify an area) by positioning the cursor on an area of  
interest in the preview area and clicking the left mouse button. The  
preview area will be doubled in size. Click again and the area will  
again be enlarged by a factor of 100%. By repeating this process, you  
can enlarge the preview display of the image up to 800% of its original  
size.  
As an alternative to the method stated above, select the Zoom tool and  
then, while holding the mouse key down, drag the cursor over the area  
you want to enlarge. A solid frame, defining the area of enlargement,  
will appear while the mouse key is being held down. Upon release of  
the mouse key, the defined area will be enlarged.  
4 Use the scroll bars to view hidden areas of the displayed preview image.  
To use the Zoom Out tool:  
1 Select the Zoom Out tool by clicking the Zoom Out tool icon.  
2 Drag the cursor to the preview area. The cursor will change to a  
magnifying glass whenever it is in the preview space.  
3 Zoom out by positioning the cursor in the preview area and clicking the  
left mouse button.  
Note: The Zoom In and Out tools do not affect the image produced by the  
Scan control. It only affects the Preview Display.  
6
Overview  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Width and Height Indicators  
The Width and Height indicators will display the width and height of the  
frame defined with the frame tool.  
File Size Indicator  
The file size indicator will display the file size that will result for the  
scanned image defined with the Frame tool.  
Prescan Button  
The Prescan button is used to obtain a low resolution preview of the  
document. The prescanned document will appear in the Preview Window.  
Scan Button  
The Scan button is used to obtain the final scan of the document after all of  
the enhancement features have been applied to the prescanned document.  
When Scan is selected, the scanned image does not appear in the Preview  
Window. It appears in the TWAIN compliant application from which the  
scan was originated.  
6-38  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting  
Clearing Jams 7-2  
Document Jams While Sending a Fax 7-2  
Paper Jams While Machine is Printing 7-3  
If Jammed in the Paper Feed Area at the Rear of the Machine 7-3  
If Paper is Jammed in the Printer Output Area 7-5  
If Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine 7-6  
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams 7-8  
LCD Display Error Messages 7-8  
Fax Problems 7-12  
Printer Problems 7-14  
Print Quality Problems 7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter7/chpt7.htm [07/09/1999 14:37:47]  
 
Chapter 7  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes Troubleshooting for the following areas:  
Clearing Jams  
LCD Display Error Messages  
Fax Problems  
Printer Problems  
Print Quality Problems  
Refer to the specific subsection for a description of the problem and  
associated solutions.  
7
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Document Jams While Sending a Fax  
If a document jams while you are sending it, DOCUMENT JAM appears in  
the display. Do not pull the document out of the slot or you may damage  
your machine.  
1 Open the control panel by pulling lightly on the Control Panel cover.  
2 Carefully remove the jammed document. Close the control panel firmly  
until it clicks into place.  
7-2  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Jams While the Machine is Printing  
By carefully selecting paper type and loading them properly, you should be  
able to avoid most paper jams. If paper jams occur, an error message  
appears in the display. Follow the steps below to clear jam. To avoid tearing  
paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly.  
If Jammed in the Paper Feed Area at the Rear of the  
Machine  
1 Remove the stack of copy paper (if necessary).  
2 Remove the jammed paper by carefully pulling it straight up using both  
hands.  
3 After you remove the jammed paper, reload the stack of copy paper  
back into the Automatic Paper Feeder with the print side facing you.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Adjust the paper guides to match the width of the paper.  
7-4  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Paper is Jammed in the Printer Output Area  
If the paper jams as it exits to the printer exit tray and most of the paper is  
visible, pull the paper straight out using both hands.  
CAUTION: If there is resistance when you pull the paper, and it does not  
move easily when you pull, stop pulling. Continue with the next section, If  
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge by lifting it carefully by the handle.  
7-6  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: The Fuser is hot. Use caution when removing the jammed  
paper.  
3 Using both hands, gently pull the paper toward you.  
4 Check that there is no other paper jammed inside the printer.  
5 Reinstall the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
6 Close the front cover.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams  
By carefully selecting print materials and loading them properly, you  
should be able to avoid most paper jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps  
outlined in Clearing Jams on page 7-2. If jams occur frequently, make sure  
that you are following these tips to avoid jams.  
Follow the procedures in Loading Paper on page 1-15 to load paper  
properly. Make sure the adjustable paper guides are positioned  
correctly.  
Do not overload the paper. Never exceed the maximum capacity of 150  
sheets of paper in the Automatic Paper Feeder.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types.  
Use only recommended print paper.  
Ensure that the recommended print side is facing up when loading  
paper into the feeder.  
Store print materials in an acceptable environment.  
LCD Display Error Messages  
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
RETRY REDIAL?  
The machine is waiting  
for the programmed  
You can press Start to  
immediately redial, or  
interval to automatically Stop to cancel the redial  
redial a previously busy  
station.  
operation.  
COMM. ERROR  
There is a fax  
communications  
problem.  
Try faxing again.  
7-8  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Jams  
Document Jams While Sending a Fax  
If a document jams while you are sending it, DOCUMENT JAM appears in  
the display. Do not pull the document out of the slot or you may damage  
your machine.  
1 Open the control panel by pulling lightly on the Control Panel cover.  
2 Carefully remove the jammed document. Close the control panel firmly  
until it clicks into place.  
7-2  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Jams While the Machine is Printing  
By carefully selecting paper type and loading them properly, you should be  
able to avoid most paper jams. If paper jams occur, an error message  
appears in the display. Follow the steps below to clear jam. To avoid tearing  
paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly.  
If Jammed in the Paper Feed Area at the Rear of the  
Machine  
1 Remove the stack of copy paper (if necessary).  
2 Remove the jammed paper by carefully pulling it straight up using both  
hands.  
3 After you remove the jammed paper, reload the stack of copy paper  
back into the Automatic Paper Feeder with the print side facing you.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Adjust the paper guides to match the width of the paper.  
7-4  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Paper is Jammed in the Printer Output Area  
If the paper jams as it exits to the printer exit tray and most of the paper is  
visible, pull the paper straight out using both hands.  
CAUTION: If there is resistance when you pull the paper, and it does not  
move easily when you pull, stop pulling. Continue with the next section, If  
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge by lifting it carefully by the handle.  
7-6  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: The Fuser is hot. Use caution when removing the jammed  
paper.  
3 Using both hands, gently pull the paper toward you.  
4 Check that there is no other paper jammed inside the printer.  
5 Reinstall the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
6 Close the front cover.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Paper Jams While the Machine is Printing  
By carefully selecting paper type and loading them properly, you should be  
able to avoid most paper jams. If paper jams occur, an error message  
appears in the display. Follow the steps below to clear jam. To avoid tearing  
paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and slowly.  
If Jammed in the Paper Feed Area at the Rear of the  
Machine  
1 Remove the stack of copy paper (if necessary).  
2 Remove the jammed paper by carefully pulling it straight up using both  
hands.  
3 After you remove the jammed paper, reload the stack of copy paper  
back into the Automatic Paper Feeder with the print side facing you.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Adjust the paper guides to match the width of the paper.  
7-4  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If Paper is Jammed in the Printer Output Area  
If the paper jams as it exits to the printer exit tray and most of the paper is  
visible, pull the paper straight out using both hands.  
CAUTION: If there is resistance when you pull the paper, and it does not  
move easily when you pull, stop pulling. Continue with the next section, If  
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge by lifting it carefully by the handle.  
7-6  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING: The Fuser is hot. Use caution when removing the jammed  
paper.  
3 Using both hands, gently pull the paper toward you.  
4 Check that there is no other paper jammed inside the printer.  
5 Reinstall the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
6 Close the front cover.  
7
Clearing Jams  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams  
By carefully selecting print materials and loading them properly, you  
should be able to avoid most paper jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps  
outlined in Clearing Jams on page 7-2. If jams occur frequently, make sure  
that you are following these tips to avoid jams.  
Follow the procedures in Loading Paper on page 1-15 to load paper  
properly. Make sure the adjustable paper guides are positioned  
correctly.  
Do not overload the paper. Never exceed the maximum capacity of 150  
sheets of paper in the Automatic Paper Feeder.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types.  
Use only recommended print paper.  
Ensure that the recommended print side is facing up when loading  
paper into the feeder.  
Store print materials in an acceptable environment.  
LCD Display Error Messages  
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
RETRY REDIAL?  
The machine is waiting  
for the programmed  
You can press Start to  
immediately redial, or  
interval to automatically Stop to cancel the redial  
redial a previously busy  
station.  
operation.  
COMM. ERROR  
There is a fax  
communications  
problem.  
Try faxing again.  
7-8  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams  
By carefully selecting print materials and loading them properly, you  
should be able to avoid most paper jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps  
outlined in Clearing Jams on page 7-2. If jams occur frequently, make sure  
that you are following these tips to avoid jams.  
Follow the procedures in Loading Paper on page 1-15 to load paper  
properly. Make sure the adjustable paper guides are positioned  
correctly.  
Do not overload the paper. Never exceed the maximum capacity of 150  
sheets of paper in the Automatic Paper Feeder.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.  
Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper types.  
Use only recommended print paper.  
Ensure that the recommended print side is facing up when loading  
paper into the feeder.  
Store print materials in an acceptable environment.  
LCD Display Error Messages  
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
RETRY REDIAL?  
The machine is waiting  
for the programmed  
You can press Start to  
immediately redial, or  
interval to automatically Stop to cancel the redial  
redial a previously busy  
station.  
operation.  
COMM. ERROR  
There is a fax  
communications  
problem.  
Try faxing again.  
7-8  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
INCOMPATIBLE  
•
Remote machine did Confirm the features of  
not have the  
the remote party’s  
machine.  
requested feature,  
such as Polling.  
The remote machine  
has insufficient  
memory to  
•
complete the  
operation you are  
attempting.  
DOCUMENT JAM  
The document jammed  
in the paper feeder.  
Refer to Clearing Jams  
on page 7-2 to remove  
any jammed paper.  
DOOR OPEN OR NO  
TONER  
The cover is not  
Press down on the cover  
until it clicks in place, or  
install the Laser Printer  
Cartridge.  
securely latched, or the  
Laser Printer Cartridge  
is not installed.  
GROUP NOT  
AVAILABLE  
You have tried to select  
a group location where  
only a single location  
number can be used.  
Group Location Feature  
is not available.  
LINE ERROR  
Your machine cannot  
connect with the remote  
site, or it has lost contact  
because of a problem on  
the phone line.  
•
•
Try again. If the  
failure persists, wait  
an hour or so for the  
line to clear, then  
try again.  
Turn on ECM mode.  
See User Options  
(System Data) on  
page 1-47.  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
You have attempted to  
set up a sending  
Load a document and  
try again.  
operation without  
loading a document.  
7
LCD Display Error Messages  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
MEMORY FULL!  
The machine’s memory  
is full.  
•
•
Delete unnecessary  
documents.  
Retransmit after  
more memory  
becomes available.  
Split the  
•
transmission into  
more than one  
operation.  
NO ANSWER!  
The remote machine has Try again. Make sure  
not answered and all  
redial attempts have  
been made.  
the remote machine is  
operational.  
NO. NOT ASSIGNED  
The One-Touch or  
Speed Dial location you  
tried to use has no  
•
•
Dial the number  
manually with the  
numeric keypad.  
Assign the number  
to a One-Touch or  
Speed Dial button  
and try again.  
number assigned to it.  
NO PAPER  
The paper feed tray is  
empty.  
Load paper.  
OVERHEAT  
The machine  
overheated.  
Wait until it cools down.  
If you cannot solve the  
problem, please call  
Xerox Service.  
PAPER JAM 0  
PAPER JAM 1  
Paper jammed in paper  
feed area.  
Press the Stop button  
and clear the jam. Refer  
to Paper Jams While the  
Machine is Printing on  
page 7-3.  
Paper jammed inside the Clear the jam. Refer to  
unit.  
Clearing Jams on page  
7-2.  
7-10  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCD Display  
Meaning  
Solution  
PAPER JAM 2  
The jammed paper is  
still inside the unit.  
Clear the jam. Refer to If  
Paper is Jammed Inside  
the Machine on page 7-  
6.  
POLLING ERROR  
•
•
The remote fax  
machine you want  
to poll is not ready  
to respond to your  
poll.  
When setting up to  
poll another fax  
machine, you have  
used an incorrect  
poll code.  
•
The remote operator  
should know in  
advance that you  
are polling and have  
their fax unit loaded  
with the original  
document.  
•
Enter the correct poll  
code.  
POWER FAILURE  
A power failure  
occurred.  
If there are documents  
stored in memory, a  
Power Failure Report  
will be printed  
automatically when the  
power is restored.  
WARMING UP  
PLEASE WAIT  
The machine is warming Wait until the machine  
up and is not ready (off- is ready (on-line).  
line).  
7
LCD Display Error Messages  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fax Problems  
Symptom  
Solution  
The machine is not  
working, there is no  
display, and the buttons are  
not working.  
•
•
Unplug the power cord and plug it in.  
Check for power at the outlet.  
There is no dial tone  
•
•
Check that the phone is connected properly  
Check the phone wall socket by plugging in  
another phone.  
The telephone numbers  
stored in memory do not  
dial correctly  
Make sure the telephone numbers are stored  
correctly in memory. Print a Telephone  
Numbers List. See Printing Reports on page 1-  
46 .  
The document does not  
feed into the machine.  
Make sure the document is not wrinkled or  
creased and you are feeding it correctly.  
You cannot receive faxes  
automatically.  
•
Ensure that either FAX or TEL/FAX mode  
is selected.  
•
•
Ensure there is paper in the machine.  
Ensure that your machine’s memory is not  
full. Check the display for a MEMORY  
FULL error message.  
The machine cannot  
receive faxes manually.  
Ensure that you are hanging up the handset  
before you press the Start button.  
NOTE: This applies only to Xerox WorkCentre  
385 models equipped with a telephone  
connected to the  
EXT. LINE jack on the bottom of the machine.  
7-12  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Solution  
The machine will not  
transmit.  
Make sure that the document is loaded face  
down.  
Check that the LCD display reads TX.  
You may have hung up the handset of the  
external phone before you pressed Start.  
Ensure the machine you are sending to is able to  
receive faxes.  
You cannot poll another  
machine.  
The fax machine you are calling may be using a  
poll code.  
Blank spaces or poor text  
quality appear in incoming  
faxes.  
•
•
The machine sending the fax may be faulty.  
Line errors due to excessive noise on phone  
line.  
•
•
Check your machine by making a copy.  
The Laser Printer Cartridge is empty.  
Stretched words appear on  
incoming faxes.  
The machine sending the fax had a temporary  
paper jam.  
Lines appear on copies or  
outgoing faxes.  
Check your machine’s scan glass for marks and  
clean it, if necessary. See Cleaning the  
Document Scanner on page 8-2.  
The machine dials a  
The other machine may be turned off, out of  
number, but fails to make a paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Have  
connection with another  
machine.  
the operator of the other machine investigate the  
problem.  
The machine is unable to  
store a document in  
memory.  
There may be insufficient memory available to  
store the document. If the display shows a  
MEMORY FULL error message, delete any  
documents you no longer need from the  
memory, then try storing the document.  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page, or on  
other pages, only a small  
strip of text is printed at the  
top of the page.  
Check the paper settings in the user option  
setup. Refer to Selectable Options on page 1-48.  
7
Fax Problems  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Problems  
Symptom  
Cause and Solution  
The printer does not print.  
•
•
The printer cable is not connected properly.  
The printer cable is defective. Swap the cable  
with one known to work. If necessary,  
replace the cable.  
•
•
The printer port is configured incorrectly.  
Check printer setting in Windows to make  
certain that the print job is being sent to the  
correct port (for example, LPT1).  
The Laser Printer Cartridge is not installed  
properly. Remove and re-insert the  
cartridge, see Installing the Laser Printer  
Cartridge on page 1-6.  
•
•
A paper jam has occurred. Refer to Clearing  
Jams on page 7-2.  
The printer may be configured incorrectly  
within an application. Check the  
application to verify that all print settings  
are correct.  
•
The printer driver may be incorrectly  
installed. Re-install the printer driver. See  
Uninstalling Software on page 1-30. Try  
printing a test page.  
The paper does not feed  
into the printer.  
•
•
Paper has not been loaded properly. Remove  
and re-insert the paper correctly. Refer to  
Loading Paper on page 1-15.  
There is too much paper in the Automatic  
Paper Feeder. Decrease the number of  
sheets of paper in the Automatic Paper  
Feeder.  
7-14  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Cause and Solution  
Half of the printed page is  
blank.  
•
•
•
The page layout is too complex. Simplify the  
page layout, and remove any unnecessary  
graphics from the document.  
The page orientation setting may be  
incorrect. Change the page orientation in the  
Print Setup dialog box.  
The paper size and the software paper size  
settings do not match. Load the correct  
paper in the printer or change the software  
paper size settings in the Print Setup dialog  
box.  
•
•
Scaling may be set to less than 100%.  
Change the scaling setting in the Paper/  
Output dialog box.  
The printer cable may be incorrect. Use or  
replace the cable with an IEEE-1284 rated  
cable.  
The printer prints the  
wrong data, or it prints  
incorrect characters.  
•
•
The printer cable may be connected  
improperly. Check the cable connection.  
There may be a problem with the printer  
driver software. Exit Windows and reboot  
the computer. Turn the printer off and on.  
The printer cable may be incorrect. Use or  
replace the cable with an IEEE-1284 rated  
cable  
•
7
Printer Problems  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Cause and Solution  
The paper keeps jamming.  
•
There is too much paper in the Automatic  
Paper Feeder. Remove some of the paper  
from the Automatic Paper Feeder. If  
printing onto transparencies, or labels, insert  
them one at a time in the Manual Paper  
Feeder.  
•
•
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use  
only paper that meets the specifications  
required by the printer.  
The paper setting method may be incorrect.  
If printing onto envelopes, insert the  
envelopes so that there is a gap of  
approximately 1 mm (1/32") between the  
left and right edges of the envelopes at the  
paper guide.  
Printing is too slow.  
•
•
If using Windows 3.1x, Print Manager may  
be disabled. From the Control Panel  
Printers menu, check the Use Print  
Manager box.  
If using Windows 3.1x, the Background  
Printing item in the Option menu of Print  
Manager may be set incorrectly. Select  
Background Printing from the Option  
menu in the Print Manager.  
•
If using Windows 95, the Spooling Setting  
may be set incorrectly. From the Start  
menu, select Settings and Printers. Click  
the Work Centre icon with the right mouse  
button, select Properties, click the Details  
tab, and then click the Spool Settings  
button. Select the desired spool setting from  
the available choices  
7-16  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Quality Problems  
Symptom  
Cause and Solution  
Toner is low or empty. Refer to Replacing the  
The page is white or the  
printout is too light to read. Laser Printer Cartridge on page 8-9.  
Irregular faded patches of  
print appear.  
•
•
There is a paper quality problem. Use only  
paper that meets the specifications required  
by the printer.  
Toner may be unevenly distributed. Remove  
the Laser Printer Cartridge and shake it  
gently to evenly distribute the toner. Re-  
install the image cartridge.  
Black staining on prints.  
•
•
There is a paper quality problem. Use only  
paper that meets printer specifications.  
A Laser Printer Cartridge from another  
Xerox printer has been installed. Always  
use the same Laser Printer Cartridge with  
the same printer. Using a cartridge that has  
already been used in another printer may  
not give satisfactory results.  
•
Clean the drum. Refer to Cleaning the  
Drum on page 8-13.  
Black streaks or ghost  
images on printouts  
Character voids.  
The paper may be too dry. Try printing with a  
different batch of paper. Always store paper in  
its original sealed package.  
Background scatter on  
printed pages.  
•
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Always  
store paper in its original sealed package.  
Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb  
too much moisture from the air.  
•
You may be printing on uneven surfaces. If  
printing envelopes, change your printing  
layout to avoid printing over areas that have  
overlapping seams on the reverse side.  
7
Print Quality Problems  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Cause and Solution  
Missing characters  
•
The paper may be too damp. Try printing  
with a different batch of paper. Always  
store paper in its original sealed package.  
Do not open packages of paper until  
necessary so that the paper does not absorb  
too much moisture from the air.  
Back of printout is dirty.  
Incorrect fonts.  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Print a few  
blank pages to clean the transfer roller.  
True Type fonts may be disabled (Windows  
3.1x). Use the Fonts dialog box in the Control  
Panel to enable True Type fonts.  
Faded graphics.  
•
Toner may be low. Remove the Laser  
Printer Cartridge and shake it gently to  
evenly distribute the toner. Reinstall the  
Laser Printer Cartridge.  
•
Replace the Laser Printer Cartridge. Have a  
spare Laser Printer Cartridge ready to  
replace the empty one.  
7-18  
Troubleshooting  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Chapter 8 Maintenance  
Clearing Memory 8-1  
Clearing the Document Scanner 8-2  
Automatic Document Feeder Rubber Pad Replacement 8-6  
Adjust Shading 8-7  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge 8-8  
Expected Cartridge Life 8-8  
Replacing the Laser Printer Cartridge 8-9  
Extending the Life of the Laser Printer Cartridge 8-12  
Cleaning the Drum 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter8/chpt8.htm [07/09/1999 14:38:41]  
 
Chapter 8  
8
Maintenance  
Clearing Memory  
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.  
1 Press Menu, then press Memory Clear on the One-Touch keypad.  
MEMORY CLEAR ITEM (1-4) appears briefly on the display followed  
by the list shown below. Use the UP and Down buttons to scroll  
through the list of options.  
Memory Clear Items  
1. SYSTEM ID  
The System ID number and name are  
cleared from the machine’s memory.  
2. SYSTEM DATA  
Restores user-selectable options to the  
default value.  
3. PHONEBK/MEMORY Clears the One-Touch, Speed Dial, or  
Group Dial numbers stored in memory.  
All the Scheduled Job operations you  
have reserved are also canceled.  
4. TX-RX JOURNAL  
Clears all records of transmissions and  
receptions.  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Highlight the memory items you want to clear by pressing the UP or  
DOWN button repeatedly until the item to be cleared is blinking.  
3 Press the Enter button.  
ARE YOU SURE? appears in the LCD display.  
4 Press 1 to confirm. Or use the Right or Left button to choose YES,  
then press the Enter button. The selected memory is cleared.  
Cleaning the Document Scanner  
To keep your machine working properly, occasionally clean the white  
roller, Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) rubber, and the scanning glass.  
If they are dirty, documents sent to another fax machine may not be clear.  
1 Open the Control Panel by pulling lightly on the Control Panel Cover  
assembly.  
8-2  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Highlight the memory items you want to clear by pressing the UP or  
DOWN button repeatedly until the item to be cleared is blinking.  
3 Press the Enter button.  
ARE YOU SURE? appears in the LCD display.  
4 Press 1 to confirm. Or use the Right or Left button to choose YES,  
then press the Enter button. The selected memory is cleared.  
Cleaning the Document Scanner  
To keep your machine working properly, occasionally clean the white  
roller, Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) rubber, and the scanning glass.  
If they are dirty, documents sent to another fax machine may not be clear.  
1 Open the Control Panel by pulling lightly on the Control Panel Cover  
assembly.  
8-2  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2 Disassemble the white roller as follows:  
a) Both ends of the white roller have plastic bushings that are used to  
secure the roller in the machine. Pull the two bushings slightly  
inward (A).  
8
b) Rotate the bushings until they reach a vertical position (B).  
c) Pull the roller upward and out of the machine.  
bushing  
3 Wipe the roller surface with a soft cloth dampened with water.  
Cleaning the Document Scanner  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Using a cotton swab or a soft dry cloth, clean the ADF rubber piece.  
5 Carefully wipe the scanning glass with a soft, dry cloth.  
If the glass is very dirty, first wipe it with a slightly dampened cloth,  
then with a dry cloth. Be very careful not to scratch the glass surface.  
scanning glass  
8-4  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Replace the roller by performing steps one and two in reverse order.  
7 Close the control panel firmly until it clicks into place.  
8
Cleaning the Document Scanner  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Document Feeder Rubber Pad  
Replacement  
1 Open the Control Panel Cover.  
2 Insert a small flat blade screwdriver under the right and left sides of the  
ADF Holder.  
ADF Holder  
ADF Sheet  
ADF Rubber  
3 Apply upward pressure to release the two locking tabs on each side of  
the assembly.  
4 Remove the assembly and replace the ADF Rubber.  
5 Reassemble the components in the order shown in the diagram above.  
6 Place the assembly back onto the ADF Holder.  
7 Press down on the assembly until it locks into position.  
8 Close the Control Panel.  
8-6  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjust Shading  
The Adjust Shading feature allows you to recalibrate the baseline value the  
Document Scanner will interpret as white when scanning documents. This  
procedure should be performed after cleaning the Document Scanner,  
particularly if the white rubber roller remains stained after cleaning.  
8
To adjust the shading:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Maintenance button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
CLEAN DRUM ? appears in the LCD display  
2 Press the Down or Up button. ADJUST SHADING ? appears in the  
display.  
3 Press the START button. The LCD display prompts you to confirm  
your choice by pressing the appropriate number key.  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
1.YES 2.NO  
Note: Selecting the 2 button on the number keypad will cancel the Adjust  
Shading operation. The LCD display will revert to the previous menu level.  
Adjust Shading  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Press 1. The LCD display prompts you to load a sheet of white paper  
into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
5 Load a single sheet of white paper into the Automatic document Feeder.  
The WorkCentre 385 immediately begins feeding the sheet of paper  
through the Automatic Document Feeder. SHADING ... appears on the  
LCD display.  
6 The WorkCentre 385 returns to standby mode.  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
Expected Cartridge Life  
The life of your Laser Printer Cartridge depends on the amount of toner  
(density) used in each print job. For instance, if the printer is typically used  
to print business letters with about 5% page coverage, the Laser Printer  
Cartridge life will be approximately 2,500 pages, using the Laser Printer  
Cartridge shipped with the machine. Subsequently purchased Laser Printer  
Cartridges will have a cartridge life of approximately 5,000 pages. The  
actual number may vary according to the density of the printed page.  
Printers that are used mainly for graphics will consume the toner in the  
Laser Printer Cartridge at a faster rate.  
You can extend the life of your Laser Printer Cartridge by using the Econo  
Mode setting, see Econo Mode Setting on page 1-38. When in Econo  
Mode, your machine prints using less toner. The printed image is much  
lighter, but it is adequate for printing draft copies of documents.  
8-8  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press 1. The LCD display prompts you to load a sheet of white paper  
into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
5 Load a single sheet of white paper into the Automatic document Feeder.  
The WorkCentre 385 immediately begins feeding the sheet of paper  
through the Automatic Document Feeder. SHADING ... appears on the  
LCD display.  
6 The WorkCentre 385 returns to standby mode.  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
Expected Cartridge Life  
The life of your Laser Printer Cartridge depends on the amount of toner  
(density) used in each print job. For instance, if the printer is typically used  
to print business letters with about 5% page coverage, the Laser Printer  
Cartridge life will be approximately 2,500 pages, using the Laser Printer  
Cartridge shipped with the machine. Subsequently purchased Laser Printer  
Cartridges will have a cartridge life of approximately 5,000 pages. The  
actual number may vary according to the density of the printed page.  
Printers that are used mainly for graphics will consume the toner in the  
Laser Printer Cartridge at a faster rate.  
You can extend the life of your Laser Printer Cartridge by using the Econo  
Mode setting, see Econo Mode Setting on page 1-38. When in Econo  
Mode, your machine prints using less toner. The printed image is much  
lighter, but it is adequate for printing draft copies of documents.  
8-8  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the cover.  
8
2 Remove the empty Laser Printer Cartridge by lifting it carefully by the  
handle. Follow the instructions printed on the cartridge box to recycle  
the used cartridge.  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Unwrap a new Laser Printer Cartridge; carefully remove the sealing  
tape.  
4 Shake the cartridge from side to side five or six times to distribute the  
toner evenly.  
8-10  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Locate the cartridge slots inside the printer, one on each side. Grasp the  
handle; slide the Laser Printer Cartridge down between the cartridge  
slots until it drops into place.  
8
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Close the cover firmly. Ensure that both side buttons have clicked into  
place.  
Extending the Life of the Laser Printer Cartridge  
When the Laser Printer Cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks or  
print density changes will occur. You can temporarily re-establish print  
quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge.  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the printer cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
3 Gently shake the cartridge from side to side to distribute the toner  
evenly.  
8-12  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Reinstall the cartridge and close the cover.  
This is typically successful for one time only. The toner will eventually run  
out and blank pages will be printed when a print job is sent, or when a fax is  
received. To restore print quality, the Laser Printer Cartridge must be  
replaced. See Installing the Laser Printer Cartridge on page 1-6.  
8
Cleaning the Drum  
If print output quality decreases due to the presence of black streaks or  
ghost images appearing on printouts, drum cleaning should be performed as  
an attempt to rectify the problem.  
To clean the drum:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Maintenance button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
CLEAN DRUM ? appears in the LCD display  
2 Press the START button. The LCD display shows drum cleaning is  
underway.  
CLEANING DRUM  
PLEASE WAIT  
The WorkCentre 385 outputs a single sheet of paper containing any  
excess toner removed from the drum.  
Cleaning the Drum  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Press 1. The LCD display prompts you to load a sheet of white paper  
into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
5 Load a single sheet of white paper into the Automatic document Feeder.  
The WorkCentre 385 immediately begins feeding the sheet of paper  
through the Automatic Document Feeder. SHADING ... appears on the  
LCD display.  
6 The WorkCentre 385 returns to standby mode.  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
Expected Cartridge Life  
The life of your Laser Printer Cartridge depends on the amount of toner  
(density) used in each print job. For instance, if the printer is typically used  
to print business letters with about 5% page coverage, the Laser Printer  
Cartridge life will be approximately 2,500 pages, using the Laser Printer  
Cartridge shipped with the machine. Subsequently purchased Laser Printer  
Cartridges will have a cartridge life of approximately 5,000 pages. The  
actual number may vary according to the density of the printed page.  
Printers that are used mainly for graphics will consume the toner in the  
Laser Printer Cartridge at a faster rate.  
You can extend the life of your Laser Printer Cartridge by using the Econo  
Mode setting, see Econo Mode Setting on page 1-38. When in Econo  
Mode, your machine prints using less toner. The printed image is much  
lighter, but it is adequate for printing draft copies of documents.  
8-8  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the cover.  
8
2 Remove the empty Laser Printer Cartridge by lifting it carefully by the  
handle. Follow the instructions printed on the cartridge box to recycle  
the used cartridge.  
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Unwrap a new Laser Printer Cartridge; carefully remove the sealing  
tape.  
4 Shake the cartridge from side to side five or six times to distribute the  
toner evenly.  
8-10  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Locate the cartridge slots inside the printer, one on each side. Grasp the  
handle; slide the Laser Printer Cartridge down between the cartridge  
slots until it drops into place.  
8
Managing the Laser Printer Cartridge  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Close the cover firmly. Ensure that both side buttons have clicked into  
place.  
Extending the Life of the Laser Printer Cartridge  
When the Laser Printer Cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks or  
print density changes will occur. You can temporarily re-establish print  
quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge.  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the printer cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
3 Gently shake the cartridge from side to side to distribute the toner  
evenly.  
8-12  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Close the cover firmly. Ensure that both side buttons have clicked into  
place.  
Extending the Life of the Laser Printer Cartridge  
When the Laser Printer Cartridge is near the end of its life, white streaks or  
print density changes will occur. You can temporarily re-establish print  
quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge.  
1 Pull the cover release buttons toward you to open the printer cover.  
2 Remove the Laser Printer Cartridge.  
3 Gently shake the cartridge from side to side to distribute the toner  
evenly.  
8-12  
Maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 Reinstall the cartridge and close the cover.  
This is typically successful for one time only. The toner will eventually run  
out and blank pages will be printed when a print job is sent, or when a fax is  
received. To restore print quality, the Laser Printer Cartridge must be  
replaced. See Installing the Laser Printer Cartridge on page 1-6.  
8
Cleaning the Drum  
If print output quality decreases due to the presence of black streaks or  
ghost images appearing on printouts, drum cleaning should be performed as  
an attempt to rectify the problem.  
To clean the drum:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Maintenance button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
CLEAN DRUM ? appears in the LCD display  
2 Press the START button. The LCD display shows drum cleaning is  
underway.  
CLEANING DRUM  
PLEASE WAIT  
The WorkCentre 385 outputs a single sheet of paper containing any  
excess toner removed from the drum.  
Cleaning the Drum  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Reinstall the cartridge and close the cover.  
This is typically successful for one time only. The toner will eventually run  
out and blank pages will be printed when a print job is sent, or when a fax is  
received. To restore print quality, the Laser Printer Cartridge must be  
replaced. See Installing the Laser Printer Cartridge on page 1-6.  
8
Cleaning the Drum  
If print output quality decreases due to the presence of black streaks or  
ghost images appearing on printouts, drum cleaning should be performed as  
an attempt to rectify the problem.  
To clean the drum:  
1 Press the Menu button, then press the Maintenance button on the One-  
Touch keypad.  
CLEAN DRUM ? appears in the LCD display  
2 Press the START button. The LCD display shows drum cleaning is  
underway.  
CLEANING DRUM  
PLEASE WAIT  
The WorkCentre 385 outputs a single sheet of paper containing any  
excess toner removed from the drum.  
Cleaning the Drum  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Chapter 9 Appendix  
Specifications 9-1  
FCC Regulations 9-3  
Send Header Requirements 9-3  
Data Coupler Information 9-3  
Radio Frequency Emissions 9-5  
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox Europe 9-6  
The Electricity at Work Regulation  
(in England and Wales) Xerox Limited ONLY 9-10  
Electricity at Work Regulations 9-10  
European Product Marking Requirements 9-14  
CTR 21 Annex II 9-14  
CTR 21 Annex III 9-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter9/chpt9.htm [07/09/1999 14:39:30]  
 
Chapter 9  
Appendix  
9
Specifications  
Applicable line  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)  
or behind PABX  
Compatibility  
CCITT Group 3  
Data coding  
MH/MR/MMR  
Modem speed  
14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps  
Approx. 6 sec. (V.17 ECM: 14.4 kbps)  
8.3 inches (210 mm)  
Transmission speed  
Effective scanning width  
Effective printing width  
Scanning method  
Memory  
8.2 inches (202 mm)  
Sheet-fed Contact Image Sensor (CIS)  
2.5 MByte  
Halftone  
64 levels  
Printing speed  
8 PPM (Letter/A4 Size)  
30 pages (20 lb or 75 g/m2)  
16 characters x 2 lines  
238 x 355 x 415 mm  
Automatic document feeder  
LCD  
Dimension (H x W x D)  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Weight  
20 lb Net, 31 lb with tray and CRU  
(9/14 Kg)  
Power requirements  
Power consumption  
230VAC/50Hz  
(Standby) 13 Watts  
(Maximum) 490 Watts  
Environmental conditions  
Temperature : 50°F to 86°F (10°C to 30°C)  
Humidity : 30% to 80% RH  
Auto dialer  
One-touch dialing (registration for 20  
numbers)  
Speed dialing (registration for 80 numbers)  
Document size - Width  
- Length  
5.8 to 8.5 inches (148 to 216 mm)  
Single page: 5 to 40 inches (120 to 1000 mm)  
Multi pages: 5 to 11.7 inches (128 to 297 mm)  
Recording paper size  
- for automatic paper feeder  
Letter: 8.5 x 11 inches (216 x 279 mm)  
A4 : 8.3 x 11.6 inches (210 x 297 mm)  
Legal : 8.5 x 14 inches (216 x 356 mm)  
- for manual paper feeder  
Length: 5 to 14 inches (125 to 356 mm)  
Width: 3.5 to 8.5 inches (90 to 216 mm)  
Recording paper weight  
- for automatic paper feeder  
-for manual paper feeder  
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m2)  
16 to 40 lb (60 to 163 g/m2)  
150 sheets; 16 to 20 lb (60 to 75 g/m2) weight  
Automatic paper feeder  
capacity  
Printing method  
Laser Scanning Unit  
Printing resolution  
600 x 600 dpi (23.6 x 23.6 lines/mm)  
Scanning resolution (fax)  
– Horizontal  
300 dpi  
– Vertical  
Standard: 98 Lpi (3.85 lines/mm)  
Fine: 196 Lpi (7.7 lines/mm)  
Super fine: 300 Lpi (11.8 lines/mm)  
9-2  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning resolution (scanner)  
Standard: 204 x 98 Lpi (8 x 3.85 lines/mm)  
Fine: 204 x 196 Lpi (8x 7.7 lines/mm)  
Super fine: 300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/  
mm)  
Copy resolution  
Battery backup  
300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/mm)  
1 to 2 hours  
9
FCC Regulations  
Send Header 5equirements  
Federal communications commission (FCC) regulations require all persons  
within the United States who send any message via a facsimile machine to  
include an identifying message in the transmission. The message must  
clearly contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity (business  
or individual) sending the message.  
This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name features required for  
the FCC regulation. To satisfy the FCC regulation, the telephone number  
and name must be included with the printed document. To comply with the  
FCC rules, carefully read and follow the instructions listed in this document  
to program the local ID and name.  
Data Coupler Information  
This Xerox Work Centre 385 machine contains an internal data coupler. Its  
use is restricted by the FCC (Federal Communications Commission). To  
comply with the FCC rules, you must carefully read and follow the  
instructions listed below.  
FCC Regulations  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning resolution (scanner)  
Standard: 204 x 98 Lpi (8 x 3.85 lines/mm)  
Fine: 204 x 196 Lpi (8x 7.7 lines/mm)  
Super fine: 300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/  
mm)  
Copy resolution  
Battery backup  
300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/mm)  
1 to 2 hours  
9
FCC Regulations  
Send Header 5equirements  
Federal communications commission (FCC) regulations require all persons  
within the United States who send any message via a facsimile machine to  
include an identifying message in the transmission. The message must  
clearly contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity (business  
or individual) sending the message.  
This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name features required for  
the FCC regulation. To satisfy the FCC regulation, the telephone number  
and name must be included with the printed document. To comply with the  
FCC rules, carefully read and follow the instructions listed in this document  
to program the local ID and name.  
Data Coupler Information  
This Xerox Work Centre 385 machine contains an internal data coupler. Its  
use is restricted by the FCC (Federal Communications Commission). To  
comply with the FCC rules, you must carefully read and follow the  
instructions listed below.  
FCC Regulations  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other  
information, the registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number  
(REN). If requested, provide this information to your telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to  
your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your  
number is called. To be certain of the number of devices you may connect  
to your line, as determined by the REN, you should call your local  
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area.  
ASK your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on  
your line. Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can severely  
damage telephone company equipment. You, not Xerox, assume all  
responsibility and/or liability for any damage caused by the connection of  
this machine to an unauthorized jack.  
You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular  
jack: RJ-11C. Use the standard line cord (with modular plugs provided with  
the installation kit to connect it.  
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this  
equipment.  
Do not connect this machine to a party or coin operated phone line.  
Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox representative or an  
authorized Xerox service agency. This applies at any time during or after  
the service warranty period. If unauthorized repair is performed, the  
remainder of the warranty period is null and void.  
9-4  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to 89/336/EEC including EN53022 ClassB.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encourage to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
9
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that  
to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Change or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the  
Xerox Corporation may void the authority granted to operate this  
equipment.  
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance  
with the regulations.  
FCC Regulations  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanning resolution (scanner)  
Standard: 204 x 98 Lpi (8 x 3.85 lines/mm)  
Fine: 204 x 196 Lpi (8x 7.7 lines/mm)  
Super fine: 300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/  
mm)  
Copy resolution  
Battery backup  
300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/mm)  
1 to 2 hours  
9
FCC Regulations  
Send Header 5equirements  
Federal communications commission (FCC) regulations require all persons  
within the United States who send any message via a facsimile machine to  
include an identifying message in the transmission. The message must  
clearly contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity (business  
or individual) sending the message.  
This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name features required for  
the FCC regulation. To satisfy the FCC regulation, the telephone number  
and name must be included with the printed document. To comply with the  
FCC rules, carefully read and follow the instructions listed in this document  
to program the local ID and name.  
Data Coupler Information  
This Xerox Work Centre 385 machine contains an internal data coupler. Its  
use is restricted by the FCC (Federal Communications Commission). To  
comply with the FCC rules, you must carefully read and follow the  
instructions listed below.  
FCC Regulations  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanning resolution (scanner)  
Standard: 204 x 98 Lpi (8 x 3.85 lines/mm)  
Fine: 204 x 196 Lpi (8x 7.7 lines/mm)  
Super fine: 300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/  
mm)  
Copy resolution  
Battery backup  
300 x 300 Lpi (11.8 x 11.8 lines/mm)  
1 to 2 hours  
9
FCC Regulations  
Send Header 5equirements  
Federal communications commission (FCC) regulations require all persons  
within the United States who send any message via a facsimile machine to  
include an identifying message in the transmission. The message must  
clearly contain an identifier and telephone number for the entity (business  
or individual) sending the message.  
This facsimile machine provides the local ID and name features required for  
the FCC regulation. To satisfy the FCC regulation, the telephone number  
and name must be included with the printed document. To comply with the  
FCC rules, carefully read and follow the instructions listed in this document  
to program the local ID and name.  
Data Coupler Information  
This Xerox Work Centre 385 machine contains an internal data coupler. Its  
use is restricted by the FCC (Federal Communications Commission). To  
comply with the FCC rules, you must carefully read and follow the  
instructions listed below.  
FCC Regulations  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other  
information, the registration number and Ringer Equivalence Number  
(REN). If requested, provide this information to your telephone company.  
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to  
your telephone line and still have all of those devices ring when your  
number is called. To be certain of the number of devices you may connect  
to your line, as determined by the REN, you should call your local  
telephone company to determine the maximum REN for your calling area.  
ASK your local telephone company for the modular jack type installed on  
your line. Connecting this machine to an unauthorized jack can severely  
damage telephone company equipment. You, not Xerox, assume all  
responsibility and/or liability for any damage caused by the connection of  
this machine to an unauthorized jack.  
You may safely connect the machine to the following standard modular  
jack: RJ-11C. Use the standard line cord (with modular plugs provided with  
the installation kit to connect it.  
A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this  
equipment.  
Do not connect this machine to a party or coin operated phone line.  
Repairs to the machine should be made only by a Xerox representative or an  
authorized Xerox service agency. This applies at any time during or after  
the service warranty period. If unauthorized repair is performed, the  
remainder of the warranty period is null and void.  
9-4  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Radio Frequency Emissions  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to 89/336/EEC including EN53022 ClassB.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encourage to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following measures:  
9
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that  
to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Change or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the  
Xerox Corporation may void the authority granted to operate this  
equipment.  
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance  
with the regulations.  
FCC Regulations  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox  
Europe  
Approvals and Certification  
The CE marking applied to this product symbolises Xerox Europe  
Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable Directives of the  
European Union as of the dates indicated:  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Council  
Directive 93/68/EEC, approximation of the laws of the member states  
related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC, approximation of the  
laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
A full declaration, defining the relevant directives and referenced standards  
can be obtained from your Xerox Europe representative or by contacting:  
Xerox Europe Product Safety,  
Xerox Europe Technical Centre,  
PO Box 17,  
Bessemer Road,  
Welwyn Garden City,  
Herts AL7 1HE, England  
WARNING: This product is certified manufactured and tested in  
compliance with strict safety and radio frequency interference regulations.  
Any unauthorised alteration which includes the addition of new functions or  
the connection of external devices may impact this certification. Please  
9-6  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
contact your local Xerox Europe representative for a list of approved  
accessories.  
WARNING: In order to allow this equipment to operate in proximity to  
industrial, Scientific and medical (ISM) equipment, the external radiation  
from the ISM equipment may have to be limited or special mitigation  
measures.  
9
Your product and supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict  
safety requirements. These include safety agency examination and  
approval, and compliance to established environmental standards. Please  
read the following instructions carefully before operating the product and  
refer to them as needed to ensure the continued safe operation of your  
product.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on, or supplied with, the  
product.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Always use  
materials specifically designated for this product. Use of other materials  
may result in poor performance and could create a hazardous situation.  
Do not use aersol cleaners. Follow the instructions in this User Guide for  
proper cleaning methods.  
Never use supplies or cleaning materials for purposes other than what they  
were intended. Keep all supplies and material out of reach of children.  
Do not use this product near water, wet locations, or outdoors.  
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product  
may fall, causing personal injury or serious damage to the product.  
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox Europe 9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING: This product must be earthed.  
This product is equipped with a 3-wire, grounding-type plug (i.e., a plug  
having a third grounding pin). This plug will only fit into a grounding-type  
power outlet. This is a safety feature. To avoid the risk of electric shock,  
contact your electrician to replace the receptacle if you are unable to insert  
the plug into the outlet. Never use a grounding adapter plug to connect the  
product to a power source receptacle that lacks a ground connection  
terminal.  
This product should be operated from the type of power source indicated  
on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available,  
consult your local power company.  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product  
where persons will step on the cord.  
Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back and bottom of the product  
are provided for ventilation. To ensure reliable operation of the product and  
to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or  
covered. The product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat  
register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless  
proper ventilation is provided.  
Never push objects of any kind into the slots of the product as they may  
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts which could result in a fire  
or electric shock.  
Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
Never remove any covers or guards that require a tool for removal, unless  
directed to do so in a Xerox approved maintenance kit.  
9-8  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Never defeat interlock switches. Machines are designed to restrict operator  
access to unsafe areas. Covers, guards, and interlock switches are provided  
to ensure that the product will not operate with covers opened.  
Use of an extension cord with this product is not recommended or  
authorized. Users should check building codes and insurance requirements  
if an extension cord is to be used. Ensure that the total ampere ratings of the  
products plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the extension cord  
ampere rating. Also make sure that the total amperage of all products  
plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the outlet rating.  
9
If you need additional safety information concerning the copier or Xerox  
supplied materials you should contact your Xerox representative or you  
may contact Xerox Environment Health and Safety on:  
*(UK) 44 (0)1707 353434  
*Safety Standards: The Xerox WorkCentre 385 is certified to EN 60950.  
Other National Standards: The Xerox WorkCentre 385 is also certified in  
compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies.  
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox Europe 9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Electricity at Work Regulation  
(in England and Wales) Xerox Limited ONLY  
Electricity at Work Regulations:  
The Electricity at Work Regulation 1989 came into force in England and  
Wales on the 1 April 1990. This 1989 Regulation places a duty on all  
employers and self-employed persons to ensure the electrical system in their  
premises are constructed, maintained and operated in such a manner as to  
prevent, so far as reasonably practical, danger. This includes ensuring all  
electrical equipment connected to such electrical systems are safely  
constructed, maintained and operated.  
All Xerox equipment have been designed to exacting safety standards.  
They have all undergone a variety of stringent safety tests including earth  
bond, insulation resistance and electrical strength tests. Xerox Europe  
manufacturing plants have been awarded ISO 9000 quality certification and  
are subject to regular audits by the British Standards Institution or  
equivalent national standards body.  
Xerox equipment which has been properly and regularly serviced and  
maintained should not have to undergo additional specific safety tests  
pursuant to the 1989 Regulation. Customers wishing to complete safety  
testing should contact Xerox Europe Technical Centre (see page 9-9) for  
advice prior to any test implementation.  
Xerox equipment should, however, be properly and regularly serviced and  
maintained at all times.  
QUESTION: What is the Electricity at Work Regulation?  
ANSWER: The Electricity at Work Regulation 1989 came into force in  
England and Wales on the 1 April 1990. This 1989 Regulation places a  
duty on all employers and self-employed persons to ensure the electrical  
systems in their premises are constructed, maintained and operated in such a  
manner as to prevent, so far as reasonably practicable, danger. This  
includes ensuring all electrical products connected to such electrical  
systems are safely constructed, maintained and operated.  
9-10  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
QUESTION: Does Xerox Europe comply with the Electricity at Work  
Regulation?  
ANSWER: The regulation places a duty on all employers and self-  
employed persons to ensure the electrical systems in their premises are,  
effectively safe.  
The regulation does not impose on, amongst others, manufacturers or  
suppliers of such electrical systems. However, rest assured that all Xerox  
equipment which Xerox Europe and its authorised distributors supplies to  
customers, conform with all the relevant safety legislation and standards.  
9
QUESTION: Is Xerox equipment safe?  
ANSWER: All Xerox equipment supplied by Xerox Europe and their  
authorised distributors conform to all relevant safety legislation and  
standards.  
QUESTION: Is the Xerox equipment in my premises safe?  
ANSWER: All Xerox equipment supplied by Xerox Europe and their  
authorised distributors conform to all relevant safety legislation and  
standards. However, like all electrical equipment, they have to be regularly  
serviced and maintained by competent persons.  
Xerox Europe Customer Service Engineers ensure Xerox equipment is  
serviced and maintained to exacting Xerox safety standards. If you would  
like your Xerox equipment to be serviced and maintained to such high  
standards, please contact your local Xerox Europe Customer Service  
Organisation. They will be pleased to assist you.  
QUESTION: Does the Xerox equipment in my premises comply with  
the Electricity at Work Regulations?  
ANSWER: All employers and self-employed persons must ensure that the  
electrical systems in their premises are safe. This will include ensuring  
Xerox equipment in such premises is safe.  
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox Europe 9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Xerox Europe’s Product Safety function has prepared a guide which  
contains a list of tests which may be completed by your Xerox Europe  
Customer Service Organisation. THESE TESTS MUST BE CARRIED  
OUT ONLY BY PERSONS WHO POSSESS THE RELEVANT  
SKILL, KNOWLEDGE AND EXPERIENCE TO CARRY OUT  
SUCH TESTS.  
Please contact the Xerox Europe Customer Service Organisation for further  
information.  
THE USE OF INAPPROPRIATE TEST PROCEDURES AND TEST  
EQUIPMENT MAY PROVIDE MISLEADING RESULTS AND MAY  
CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO  
PROPERTY.  
QUESTION: I would like to carry out my own safety tests on the Xerox  
equipment in my premises.  
ANSWER: You may, of course, request such tests as you deem necessary  
to satisfy yourself that your Xerox equipment is safe. Your Xerox Europe  
Customer Support will be pleased to advise you on such testing.  
QUESTION: I require records of all tests.  
ANSWER: After safety testing, your Xerox Europe Customer Service  
Engineer will provide you with a certificate which details the results of all  
tests completed.  
In the event of any defect being noted, the Xerox equipment will be  
switched off and disconnected from the supply until the defect has been  
corrected. You will be advised of such action to enable such defects to be  
corrected.  
PLEASE NOTE: YOU MUST ENSURE THAT YOUR XEROX  
EQUIPMENT IS SAFE AT ALL TIMES.  
9-12  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Please contact us if you have any queries regarding the information  
provided in this document.  
Xerox Europe Product Safety,  
Xerox Europe Technical Centre,  
PO Box 17,  
Bessemer Road,  
Welwyn Garden City,  
Herts AL7 1HE, England  
9
Safety and Legal Requirements for Xerox Europe 9-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
European Product Marking Requirements  
CTR 21 Annex II  
The equipment has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/  
482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched  
telephone network (PSTN). However, due to differences between the  
individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of  
itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every  
PSTN network termination point.  
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the  
first instance.  
CTR 21 Annex III  
The Xerox fax options for the WorkCentre 385 have been approved in  
accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single  
terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN).  
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in  
different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional  
assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination  
point. In the event of problems, you should contact your local Xerox  
representative in the first instance.  
9-14  
Appendix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In general, under the scope of this approval, this product has been designed  
to work with the national PSTNs of the following countries:  
Austria  
Greece  
Norway  
Portugal  
Spain  
Belgium  
Denmark  
Finland  
Iceland  
Ireland  
9
Italy  
Sweden  
France  
Luxembourg  
United Kingdom  
Switzerland  
Germany  
Netherlands  
The test standard used for this approval is TBR21. To assist in the use and  
application of terminal equipment approved against this standard, the  
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an  
advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and voluntary  
additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21  
terminals. The Xerox fax functions have been designed against, and are  
fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this  
document.  
The fax kits may also be configured by a Xerox representative to be  
compatible with other country networks. Other countries, not listed above,  
will be approved against their own National requirements. Please contact  
your Xerox representative if the WorkCentre 385 needs to be reconnected to  
another country’s network. There are no user adjustable settings on the fax  
option.  
European Product Marking Requirements  
9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Chapter 10 Glossary  
Glossary 10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/chapter10/chpt10.htm [07/09/1999 14:39:54]  
 
Chapter 10  
Glossary  
10  
Glossary of Terms & Definitions  
The following terms and definitions pertain to the Xerox WorkCentre 385.  
Term  
Definition  
ANS/FAX Mode  
To use this mode, you must have an answering  
machine attached to the EXT.LINE jack on the  
back of the machine. In ANS/FAX mode, the  
machine automatically answers the phone call.  
If the machine detects a fax signal, it will receive  
that fax. If a fax signal is not detected, the  
machine will send the call to the answering  
machine. For this function, the LCD display on  
the control panel shows ANS/FAX.  
Automatic Paper  
Feeder  
You can stack up to 150 sheets of plain paper or  
up to 10 envelopes or other special media in this  
feeder. It will feed the loaded sheets  
automatically.  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Centronics  
Contrast  
This refers to the type of printer cable needed for  
this machine. It is called a Centronics parallel  
interface cable that supports bi-directional  
communications (IEEE standard 1284) between  
your machine and your PC.  
This refers to the difference or contrast between  
light and dark areas of an image. There is a  
Contrast button on the control panel, to increase  
or decrease image contrast on printed sheets.  
Cover Release buttons There are two cover release buttons, one on each  
side of the front cover. You open the front cover  
by simultaneously pressing inward and pulling  
forward on these buttons.  
Dial Mode  
You can select the type of phone line service for  
your machine: Dial or pulse mode.  
Document Scanner  
The Document Scanner is a device in your  
machine that scans your document for the  
purpose of copying or faxing that document.  
Document Exit Tray  
Document Guides  
The Document Exit Tray fits into the slots on the  
front of your machine, just above the Printer Exit  
Tray. The Document Exit Tray holds those  
sheets scanned for fax purposes.  
Also called paper guides. These guides can be  
adjusted to the width of the paper medium There  
are two pairs of guides: one for the Automatic  
Paper Feeder and one for the Manual Paper  
Feeder.  
10-2  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Document Tray  
dpi  
The Document Tray fits into the slots in the top  
of your machine. It holds those documents that  
will be scanned for fax or copy purposes.  
Dots per inch abbreviation. A unit of measure  
indicating the resolution of the image. The  
greater the DPI value, the higher the resolution of  
the image. There is a Resolution button on the  
control panel.  
DRPD  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection abbreviation.  
This is a telephone company service that lets you  
use a single phone line to answer several  
different phone numbers.  
10  
Dual job  
Your machine can perform more than one  
function at the same time. For example, you can  
print a PC document while sending a fax, or store  
a fax for later transmission while printing an  
incoming fax.  
ECM MODE  
This refers to Error Correction Mode, and lets  
you compensate for poor phone line quality and  
ensures accurate, error-free transmission. When  
ECM Mode is enabled, transmission time may  
increase.  
Econo Mode  
EXT. LINE  
This setting lets you use toner in the most  
efficient way. While this mode preserves toner,  
print quality may be reduced.  
This is a jack on the back of the machine where  
you can plug a phone set or answering machine.  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAX Mode  
FCC  
In FAX Mode, the machine automatically  
answers the call to receive a fax. For this  
function, the LCD display on the control panel  
shows FAX.  
Federal Communications Commission. This a  
branch of the United States Federal Government  
that establishes laws and standards for any  
machines involving communications. There is  
an FCC Registration number on your machine’s  
Xerox label, located on the back of the machine.  
Flash  
Pressing this button on the control panel  
performs the equivalent of a switch-hook. This  
is useful when you have call waiting, and want to  
put the first caller on hold to take the second call.  
If you do not have call waiting, pressing the  
Flash button could disconnect your call.  
Forced Memory  
Home Contrast  
When this feature is turned on, all documents  
will be automatically scanned into memory  
before transmission. This eliminates the waiting  
time between faxes.  
This term is the same as default contrast mode,  
and is used whenever a document is sent or  
copied. You can override this default mode.  
10-4  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Resolution  
IC  
This term is the same as default resolution mode,  
and it is used whenever a document is sent or  
copied. You can override this default mode.  
Industry Canada. This refers to IC labels that  
identify equipment certified in Canada.  
Laser Printer Cartridge The image cartridge is the removable,  
replaceable cartridge containing the toner  
powder that constitutes the printed image.  
ips  
Inches per second.  
Landscape  
Landscape orientation on the printed page refers  
to the image horizontal dimension being longer  
than the vertical dimension.  
10  
Last Fax Data Reprint Your machine stores the last 10 pages of  
received fax data. If toner is low, and the last  
received fax page is printed too light, you can  
reprint the last fax pages after the image  
cartridge is replaced.  
LCD  
Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD on your  
machine is located near the top edge of the  
control panel. This LCD is used to display all  
menu items and error messages.  
LPT1  
Line Printer 1. Most PCs have a single parallel  
port that is connected to the printer with a  
Centronics cable. Some PCs have a second  
parallel port called LPT2.  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MB  
Megabyte. A measure of memory storage  
capacity.  
mm  
Millimeter. A unit of length.  
MMDDYY  
This expression refers to MonthDayYear in a six  
digit format.  
On/Off Line  
This button found on the control panel turns your  
machine on-line or off-line. A lamp lights when  
the machine is turned on-line.  
One-touch buttons  
This is a set of 20 buttons found on the left front  
of the machine’s control panel. Each button can  
be set up to automatically speed dial a phone  
number or a group of phone numbers.  
One-touch Label  
OS  
This is a removable paper label that is positioned  
over the one-touch buttons on the left front of the  
machine’s control panel.  
Operating System. Windows 95 is an Operating  
System.  
Parallel interface port This refers to the printer port found on the back  
of your machine. The Centronics printer cable  
plugs into this port.  
10-6  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print density  
Portrait  
The print density can be changed between  
medium and dark on your machine.  
A printing term specifying that the long axis of  
the printed page is vertically oriented.  
Power Saving  
This feature lets you reduce machine power  
when the printer is idle. You can change the  
length of time the printer waits after a job is  
printed before power is reduced.  
Printer Driver  
The Printer Driver is software that you load into  
your PC that enables your PC to print a  
document from its PC application to your printer.  
Printer Exit Tray  
This tray fits into the bottom front of your  
machine, and holds the printed sheets as they exit  
from the machine. This tray has an extender flap  
for longer sheets.  
10  
Priority Term  
If you want to print a PC document while the  
machine is printing a received fax, you can press  
the Print Priority button to stop the fax printing.  
You can then print the PC document. The fax  
document is stored in memory for later printing.  
RAM  
Random Access Memory. All PCs need RAM to  
execute programs.  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Redial  
When you press the Redial button, the machine  
automatically begins to send the document that is  
loaded in the document tray, using the phone  
number previously dialed.  
Redial Term  
Redial Try  
REN  
This refers to the period of time before an  
automatic redial occurs.  
This refers to the number of redials the machine  
will attempt before giving up.  
Ringer Equivalence Number. This number can  
be found on the label located on the back of your  
machine.  
Remote diagnosis  
You can have your machine checked out through  
the phone line by a service company at a remote  
place.  
Resolution  
see DPI.  
Ringer volume  
You can adjust the machine’s ringer to the  
desired volume.  
RTI  
Receive Terminal Identification. This feature  
automatically prints the page number, the date,  
and the time of reception on each page of a  
received fax.  
10-8  
Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RX Reduction  
When your machine receives a document that is  
longer than the paper loaded in your machine, the  
machine can reduce the data in the document to  
fit into your loaded paper size. Options also  
include Horizontal Reduction (reduce data in  
size) and Discard Size (discard excess image at  
the bottom).  
Select language  
Sound control  
System ID  
You can select the LCD display language from  
English, German, French, Italian or Spanish.  
You can choose if an alarm to sounds when an  
error occurs in the machine.  
The System ID consists of your telephone  
number (up to 20 digits and pauses) and name  
(up to 20 characters).  
10  
System reports  
Your machine can print many different system  
reports including: Help List, Message  
Confirmation Report, Schedule Information List,  
Telephone Number List, System Data List,  
Transmission or Reception Journal, Multi-  
Communication Report, Call Back Message, and  
Power Failure Report.  
TEL LINE  
This is a jack on the back of your machine into  
which you plug the telephone line cord for all  
phone-related purposes.  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TEL Mode  
In TEL Mode, your machine is set for you to  
manually answer any call. If you hear a fax  
signal, you then press the Start button and hang  
up the handset of the external phone to begin  
receiving the fax. For this function, the LCD  
display on the control panel shows TEL.  
TEL/FAX Mode  
In TEL/FAX mode, the machine automatically  
answers the call. If the machine detects a fax  
signal, it will receive that fax. If a fax signal is  
not detected, the machine will give another  
ringing tone to tell you it is a phone call. For this  
function, the LCD display on the control panel  
shows TEL/FAX.  
Xerox label  
This is the machine label found on the back of  
your machine. It contains such items as the  
Federal Communications Commission  
Registration number, the Ringer Equivalence  
Number and the machine’s serial number.  
10-10 Glossary  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Work Centre 385 User Manual  
Index  
A
Adding documents 3-13  
Adjust Shading 8-7  
ANS/FAX mode  
Receiving faxes automatically 4-5  
Answer on ring 1-52  
Auto Journal 1-48  
Automatic Dialing 3-15  
One-Touch Dialing 3-15  
Automatic Paper Feeder 1-15  
Automatic redialing 3-31  
B
Broadcasting 3-9  
Buttons  
Contrast 1-33  
Copy 1-32  
Flash 1-33  
Menu 1-32  
On/Off Line Button 1-32  
Print Priority 1-32  
Receive 1-33  
Redial/Pause -33  
Resolution 1-33  
Right and Left 1-32  
Search/Delete 1-33  
Speaker 1-33  
Speed/Dual 1-33  
Start/Enter 1-32  
Stop 1-32  
Up and Down 1-32  
C
Canceling  
Fax Transmission 3-7  
Polling 3-37  
Standby operations 3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (1 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
 
Index  
Choosing a lacation 1-4  
Cleaning the document scanner 8-2  
Clearing Jams 7-2, 7-3  
Clock Mode 1-56  
Colation 2-1, 2-2, 2-4  
Color Channel 6-20  
Confirming fax transmission 3-8  
Contrast Button 1-33  
Contrast settings for faxes 3-23  
Control locations and functions 1-2  
Copy  
Adjusting contrast 2-3  
Collate menu 2-4  
Enlarging/Reducing 2-4  
Features 2-1  
Grouping 2-4  
Making a copy 2-1  
Quick copy 2-2  
Setting the number of copies 2-3  
Sorting 2-4  
Using Copy meny features 2-3  
Copy Button 1-32  
D
Delayed Transmission 3-11, 3-13  
Canceling 3-14  
Delete Button 1-33  
Dial Mode 1-49  
Discard Size 1-52  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection 4-8  
Document Jams  
Avoiding 7-8  
Document scanner  
Cleaning 8-2  
Drivers  
Uninstalling 1-30  
DRPD 1-53  
Drum  
Cleaning 8-13  
Dual Button 1-33  
Dual functions 1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (2 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
E
Econo Mode 1-38  
Enlarging copies 2-4  
Enter Button 1-32  
Envelopes  
Loading 1-15  
Error Correction Mode 1-50  
Error messages 7-8  
F
Fax Mode  
Receiving automatically 4-3  
Fax problems 7-12  
Faxing  
Adding documents to 3-13  
After talking 3-6  
Automatic Redial 3-31  
Canceling standby operations 3-14  
Canceling Transmission 3-7  
Confirming Transmission 3-8  
Delayed Transmission 3-11  
Manual sending 3-3  
Memory Transmission 3-9  
Preparing documents 3-2  
Priority Transmission 3-32  
Receiving  
Automatically 4-3  
Automatically in ANS/FAX mode 4-5  
Automatically in TEL/FAX mode 4-3  
Manually in TEL mode 4-4  
Receiving faxes too light to read 4-7  
Receiving when out of paper 4-6  
Reception Modes 4-2  
Send options 3-1  
Sending  
Using Group Dialing 3-5  
Using One-Touch numbers 3-4  
Setting contrast 3-23  
Setting resolution 3-21  
FCC Regulations 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (3 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Feeding single print media 1-20  
File Size Indicator 6-38  
Flash 3-31  
Flash Button 1-33  
Flip Image 6-32  
G
Getting Started 1-1  
Home Resolution and Contrast 1-35  
Loading envelopes 1-15  
Loading Paper 1-15  
Loading transparencies 1-16  
Paper guidelines 1-22  
Print media specifications 1-13  
Ringer volume 1-34  
Setting System ID 1-42  
System setup 1-34  
Using the Automatic Paper Feeder 1-15  
Using the Manual Paper Feeder 1-20  
Glossary 10-1  
Group Dialing 3-19  
Sending Faxes 3-5  
Storing numbers 3-19  
Grouping copies 2-4  
H
Highlight 6-20  
Home Resolution and Contrast 1-35  
Horizontal Reduction 1-51  
I
Images  
Scanning 6-4  
Installing Software 1-24  
Invert Image 6-23  
J
Jams 7-2  
Avoiding 7-8  
L
Language Selection 1-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (4 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Laser Fax Advanced Features 3-43  
Laser Print Cartridge  
Expected life 8-8  
Extending the life of 8-12  
Installation 1-6  
Managing 8-8  
Replacing 8-9  
LaserFAX  
Application Features 3-49  
Phonebook 3-53  
Receiving faxes 4-13  
Sending faxes 3-39  
Troubleshooting 3-53, 4-15  
Last Fax Data 4-7  
Erasing from memory 4-8  
Last Fax Data Reprint 1-39  
LCD error messages 7-8  
Level Adjustment 6-23  
Loading envelopes 1-15  
Loading Paper 1-15  
Automatic Paper Feeder 1-15  
Loading transparencies 1-16  
M
Maintenance 8-1  
ADF Rubber Pad Replacement 8-6  
Adjust Shading 8-7  
Cleaning the document scanner 8-2  
Cleaning the drum 8-13  
Extending Printer Cartridge life 8-12  
Laser Printer Cartridge life 8-8  
Printer Cartridge Management 8-8  
Printer Cartridge Replacement 8-9  
Making a Copy 2-1  
Manual Faxing 3-2  
Manual Paper Feeder 1-20  
Memory  
Erasing last fax data 4-8  
Receiving faxes into 4-6  
Redial memory 3-28  
Searching by first letter 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (5 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Searching for a number 3-28  
Searching sequentially 3-29  
Memory Transmission 3-9  
Menu Button 1-32  
Message Confirmation Report 1-48, 3-8  
Midtone 6-21  
N
Number Keypad 1-33  
O
On/Off Line Button 1-32  
One-Touch Address Label Sheet 3-16  
One-touch Keypad 1-32  
One-Touch numbers sending faxes 3-4  
Other Functions 3-28  
P
Paper  
Loading 1-15  
Receiving faxes into memory 4-6  
Paper guidelines 1-22  
Paper size 1-48  
Pause Button 1-33  
PC Faxing 3-38, 4-9  
Receiving 4-13  
Sending 3-39  
Polling 3-34, 4-9  
Adding documents 3-36  
Canceling 3-37  
Receiving from remote machines 4-9  
Sending to a remote machine 3-34  
Power Saving 1-49  
Preparing documents for faxing 3-1  
Print media specifications 1-13  
Print Priority Term 1-55  
Print Priority Button 1-32  
Print quality problems 7-17  
Printer problems 7-14  
Printer settings 5-2  
Windows 3.x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (6 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Accessing and changing 5-3  
Number of copies 5-4  
Paper size 5-5  
Paper source 5-4  
Portrait/Landscape 5-4  
Reduce/enlarge 5-5  
Tab menu buttons 5-5  
Windows 95  
Image Quality Tab 5-11  
Paper Output Tab 5-9  
Windows 95/98 5-8  
Windows NT 4.0 5-13  
Printing 4-7, 5-1  
Clearing document jams 7-3  
Documents 5-1  
Printer settings 5-2  
Printing last fax data 4-7  
Priority Term 1-55  
Priority Transmission 3-32  
Product Marking Requirements 9-14  
R
Receive Button 1-33  
Receiving faxes  
Out of paper 4-6  
To PC 4-13  
Too light to read 4-7  
Reception Modes 4-2  
Redial 3-28  
Interval 1-52  
Last number 3-28  
number of tries 1-52  
Searching redial memory 3-28  
Redial Button 1-33  
Redial Interval 1-52  
Reduce/Enlarge when scanning 6-15  
Reducing copies 2-4  
Remote Code 1-49  
Remote Diagnosis Protection 1-37  
Reports 1-44  
Auto Journal 1-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (7 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Message Confirmation 1-48  
Reprint 1-55  
Resolution  
Of faxes 3-21  
Settings for scanning 6-13  
Resolution Button 1-33  
Right and Left Buttons 1-32  
Ringer volume 1-34  
RX Polling 4-9  
RX Reduction 1-50  
S
Scan Button 6-38  
Scanning 6-1  
Advanced Selection 6-22  
Art print 6-18  
Basic Tab 6-10  
Color Channel 6-20  
Descreen 6-17  
File Size Indicator 6-38  
Filter 6-30  
Filters Tab 6-30  
Flip Image 6-32  
Frame Tool 6-35  
Grey 256 Scales 6-11  
Halftone B/W 6-11  
Help 6-8  
Highlight 6-20  
Image Control Tools 6-35  
Image Type 6-10  
Invert Image 6-33  
Level Adjustment 6-23  
Lineart B/W 6-12  
Midtone 6-21  
Newspaper 6-18  
Overview 6-1  
Preview Window 6-34  
Reduce/Enlarge 6-15  
Resolution 6-13  
Scaling factor 6-15  
Scan Button 6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (8 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Scanner Control Tabs 6-9  
Shadow 6-21  
Starting the scanner program 6-3  
To scan an image 6-4  
Tonal Map 6-26  
Width and Height Indicators 6-38  
With TextBridge Pro 6-5  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner program 6-2  
Zoom tools 6-36  
Search Button 1-33  
Sending a fax  
Clearing document jams 7-2  
From a PC 3-39  
Manually 3-3  
Setting Options  
Answer on ring 1-52  
Auto Journal 1-48  
Dial Mode 1-49  
Discard Size 1-52  
DRPD 1-53  
ECM Mode 1-50  
Horizontal Reduction 1-51  
Message conf. 1-48  
Paper size 1-48  
Power Saving 1-49  
Priority Term 1-55  
Redial Interval 1-52  
Redial tries 1-52  
Remote Code 1-49  
RX Reduction 1-50  
Setting the number of copies 2-3  
Setting up your machine 1-1  
AC Power Cord connection 1-12  
Document Exit Tray 1-5  
Document Tray 1-4  
Extension Phone 1-9  
Installing the Printer Cartridge 1-6  
Printer Cable 1-10  
Printer Exit Tray 1-5  
Telephone Line 1-9  
Shadow 6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (9 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Software  
Uninstalling 1-30  
Sorting copies 2-4  
Sound control 1-36  
Speaker Button 1-33  
Speaker Volume 1-40  
Specifications 9-1  
Print media 1-13  
Speed Button 1-33  
Speed Dialing 3-18  
Storing a number 3-18  
Start Button 1-32  
Stop Button 1-32  
Storing a One-Touch Number 3-15  
System Data  
Answer on Ring 1-52  
Auto Journal 1-48  
Dial Mode 1-49  
Discard Size 1-52  
DRPD 1-53  
ECM Mode 1-50  
Horizontal Reduction 1-51  
Message Conf. 1-48  
Paper size 1-48  
Power Saving 1-49  
Priority Term 1-55  
Redial Intercal 1-52  
Redial tries 1-52  
Remote Code 1-49  
RX Reduction 1-50  
System ID 1-42  
System Requirements 1-24  
System setup 1-34  
T
TEL mode  
Receiving faxes manually 4-4  
TEL/FAX mode  
Receiving faxes automatically 4-3  
Telephone Line connection 1-9  
TextBridge Pro  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (10 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Scanning with 6-5  
Tonal Map 6-26  
Tone 3-30  
Transparencies Loading 1-16  
Troubleshooting 7-1  
Clearing Jams 7-2  
Clearing jams when faxing 7-2  
Clearing jams when printing 7-3  
Fax problems 7-12  
LCD error messages 7-8  
Print quality problems 7-17  
Printer problems 7-14  
Tips for avoiding jams 7-8  
TWAIN with TextBridge Pro 6-5  
TX Polling 3-34  
U
Uninstalling Software 1-30  
User Options 1-47  
Setting 1-47  
Using the Control Panel 1-32  
Using te Number Keypad 3-23  
Editing Numbers or Names 3-27  
Entering Alphanumeric Characters 3-24  
Entering Numbers 3-26  
Inserting Pause 3-27  
Keypad Charater Assignments 3-26  
V
Volume  
Speaker adjustment 1-40  
W
When faxing 7-2  
When printing 7-3  
Windows3.x  
Number of copies 5-4, 5-5  
Paper source 5-4  
Portrait/Landscape 5-4  
Reduce/enlarge 5-5  
Tab menu buttons 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (11 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
Index  
Windows95  
Printer Settings  
Image Quality Tab 5-11  
Paper Output Tab 5-9  
Windows 95/98  
Printer Settings 5-8  
Windows NT 4.0  
Printer Settings 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
http://xww.xedoc.world.xerox.com/data/XEDOC/Central/Multifunction/wc385/user/385index.htm (12 of 12) [07/09/1999 14:40:08]  
DISCARD SIZE - When receiving or copying a document as long as or  
longer than the paper installed in your fax machine, you can set the fax  
machine to discard any excess image at the bottom of the page, to fit  
into the recording paper size.  
If the received page is outside the margin you set, it will be printed on  
two sheets of paper at the actual size.  
If the data is within the margin, and the Auto Reduction feature is  
turned ON, it will be reduced to fit into the appropriate size paper  
(Discard does not take place). If the Auto Reduction feature is turned  
OFF or fails, the data within the margin will be discarded.  
Using the Number keypad, enter the desired discard size, and press the  
Enter button to store your selection.  
REDIAL INTERVAL - Your machine can automatically redial a remote  
fax machine if it was busy or does not answer the first call attempt.  
Enter the number of minutes (from 1 to 15) using the Number keypad.  
REDIALS - Enter the number of redial attempts (from 0 to 9) you wish  
your machine to make before giving up.  
Note: If you enter 0, the machine will not redial.  
ANSWER ON RING - You can select the number of times your  
machine rings before answering an incoming call. If you are using your  
machine as both a telephone and a fax machine, it is recommended that  
you set the ring count to at least 4 to allow you time to answer a call.  
Enter the ring count by selecting a number from 1 through 7 on the  
Number keypad.  
1-52  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Search/Delete  
Use to search for  
numbers in  
1
memory. Also use  
to delete digits in  
the edit mode.  
Receive  
(Receive Mode)  
Use to choose the  
receive mode you  
want to use. The  
selected mode is  
displayed.  
Resolution  
Use to choose the  
resolution of  
copied or  
transmitted  
documents.  
Contrast  
Use to choose the  
contrast of copied  
or transmitted  
documents.  
Number Keypad  
Use to dial  
numbers  
manually or to  
enter letters and  
numbers for  
various  
programming  
functions.  
Speed/Dual  
Use to dial calls and send fax documents by  
entering a 2-digit number. Also use to switch  
the LCD display between tasks while  
performing dual jobs.  
Redial/Pause  
Use to redial the last phone number called.  
You can also use it to add a pause when  
storing a number in memory.  
Flash  
Use to perform a switch-hook operation such  
as call waiting.  
Speaker  
Use to adjust the volume of the internal  
speaker.  
Using the Control Panel  
1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLOCK MODE - Use this feature to determine how time is displayed  
on your machine.  
Press 1 to select a 12 hour Clock Mode.  
Press 2 to select a 24 hour Clock Mode.  
1-56  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To make a quick copy:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 If necessary, press the Contrast button.  
You may choose NORMAL, DARKEN, LIGHTEN or PHOTO.  
4 Press the Copy button.  
5 Using the Number keypad, enter the number of copies you wish to  
make. The default setting is 01 copy.  
6 Press the Copy button.  
Or  
Press the Start button.  
The machine copies the document.  
Note: When making copies, resolution is automatically set to Super Fine.  
The Copy Collate menu is not available if you reduce or enlarge the image  
size. The Enlarge\Reduce menu is not available if you set the copy job to  
be collated.  
2-2  
Making a Copy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5 The display shows the next option: the REDUCE\ENLARGE menu.  
REDUCE\ENLARGE  
1.AUTO 2.MANUAL  
a) Selecting 1. AUTO, will cause the WorkCentre 385 to  
automatically reduce the copy size of each page to fit on a single  
page.  
b) Selecting 2. MANUAL, brings up the COPY RATE menu, where  
you can manually adjust the copy image scale size settings.  
The number in the right corner of the bottom line shows the current  
image percentage. To reduce or enlarge the image size, enter the  
percent value (50 to 200) using the Number keypad.  
ENTER RATE  
[50-200] <100>  
Press the Down button to confirm your settings.  
6 The display shows the next option: the COPY COLLATE menu.  
[COPY COLLATE]  
1:ON 2:OFF  
2-4  
Making a Copy  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Color Channel  
The Color Channel radio buttons are used to specify the color channel in  
which to change the Highlight, Shadow and Midtone values.  
The only channel available to be selected when using the WorkCentre 385  
to scan is the Gray channel. Red, Green and Blue are used for scanners  
capable of scanning documents in color.  
Highlight  
The Highlight value represents the lightest value in an image. All pixels  
above this point will be rendered as pure white. If you subsequently broaden  
the highlight points on the Level Adjustment graph, the pixels will be re-  
mapped within the new range, thus allowing you to see more detail in the  
image.  
6-20  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To make copies using the Copy menu features:  
1 Adjust the document guides to match the width of the document.  
2 Slide the document face down into the Automatic Document Feeder  
until it is grasped and pulled into the machine.  
3 If necessary, press the Contrast button.  
You may choose NORMAL, DARKEN, LIGHTEN or PHOTO.  
2
4 Press the Copy button to display the COPY menu. For two or more  
copies (2 to 99), enter the desired number using the Number keypad,  
then press the Down button.  
COPY  
[01-99] <01>  
Making a Copy  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOTE CODE - The remote receive start code allows you to initiate  
fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT. LINE  
jack on the back of the machine. If you pick up the extension phone  
and hear fax tones, enter the Remote Code and the machine will start  
receiving. The Remote Code is preset to *9* at factory. You may  
change the Remote Code by selecting any number from 0 to 9 on the  
numeric keypad.  
1
POWER SAVING - The power saving menu item lets you reduce  
power usage when the printer is idle.  
Press 1 to turn the feature ON. The display asks you to determine the  
length of time the printer waits after printing a job before going to a  
reduced power state. Press one of the following:  
1 for 10 minutes  
2 for 15 minutes  
3 for 30 minutes  
4 for 45 minutes  
5 for 60 minutes  
Or  
If your printer is used constantly, press 2 to turn Power Saving OFF.  
This keeps the printer ready to print with minimum warm-up time.  
DIAL MODE - Select the type of dial system your fax machine is  
connected to:  
Press 1 if the fax machine is connected to a tone (Touch Tone) dial line.  
Press 2 if the fax machine is connected to a pulse (Rotary) dial line.  
System Setup  
1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) MODE - Distinctive Ring  
is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single  
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The  
particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different  
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and  
short ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services  
who answer telephones for many different clients. They need to know  
which number someone is calling on to properly answer the phone.  
1
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax machine  
can "learn" the ring pattern you designate to be answered as a fax.  
Unless you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized  
and answered as a fax call. All other ringing patterns will be forwarded  
to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT.  
LINE jack.  
Note: Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option,  
Distinctive Ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the  
telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection, you will  
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial  
your FAX number from outside.  
System Setup  
1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ECM MODE (Error Correction Mode) - This mode compensates for  
poor line quality and ensures accurate, error-free communication with  
any other ECM-equipped facsimile machine. If the line quality is poor,  
transmission time may be increased when ECM is enabled.  
Press 1 to turn the Error Correction mode on.  
Press 2 to turn the Error Correction mode off.  
RX REDUCTION - When receiving a document as long as or longer  
than the paper installed in your machine, the machine can reduce the  
data in the document to fit the paper size currently loaded in the  
machine.  
Use this feature if you want to automatically reduce an incoming page  
(that would otherwise be divided into two pages) to fit on a single page.  
If the fax machine cannot reduce the data to fit into one page with this  
feature enabled, the data is divided and printed in actual size on two or  
more sheets.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on. Note that this feature does not apply to  
the copy mode.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off. The overflow data will be printed out on  
a second page.  
1-50  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Width and Height Indicators  
The Width and Height indicators will display the width and height of the  
frame defined with the frame tool.  
File Size Indicator  
The file size indicator will display the file size that will result for the  
scanned image defined with the Frame tool.  
Prescan Button  
The Prescan button is used to obtain a low resolution preview of the  
document. The prescanned document will appear in the Preview Window.  
Scan Button  
The Scan button is used to obtain the final scan of the document after all of  
the enhancement features have been applied to the prescanned document.  
When Scan is selected, the scanned image does not appear in the Preview  
Window. It appears in the TWAIN compliant application from which the  
scan was originated.  
6-38  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rotate Image  
This selection provides the ability to rotate an image. The rotation  
mechanism rotates an image clockwise in 90º increments.  
Flip Image  
This selection provides the ability to flip an image. The flipping  
mechanism flips an image about the horizontal or vertical axis.  
6-32  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Straighten the edges on a level surface.  
Note: If envelopes jam while printing, try reducing the number of  
envelopes in the Automatic Paper Feeder.  
For transparencies, refer to the packaging for the transparency stock to  
determine the print side. Hold the transparencies by the edges and  
avoid touching the print side. Be careful not to scratch or leave  
fingerprints on the print side.  
Fan the stack of transparencies to prevent feeding failures.  
1-16  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
H. REDUCTION (Horizontal) - If you turn the RX reduction feature  
on, you are allowed to set the Horizontal Reduction feature on or off.  
With Horizontal Reduction enabled, the machine will reduce an  
incoming page containing overflow data along the vertical axis only.  
The net effect of Horizontal Reduction will be a vertical compression of  
the image as shown below:  
1
Received data  
Original  
If you want to reduce incoming pages equally along both axes in order  
to maintain the proportionality of the original image, turn the horizontal  
reduction feature off. If you turn this feature off, the machine reduces  
the data as shown below.  
Received data  
Original  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
System Setup  
1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To start the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application:  
Note: To start the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application from  
TextBridge Pro, refer to Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner  
Application from TextBridge Pro below.  
1 Plug in the WC 385 and switch on your PC.  
2 Start Windows.  
3 Start/Open the TWAIN-compliant image-editing application.  
4 In most programs, choose the Select Source option from the File menu.  
5 Select 385Scan in the Select Source dialog box.  
6 Open the File menu, and select the Acquire option. The WorkCentre  
385 TWAIN Scanner window will appear (see The WorkCentre 385  
Twain Scanner Window on page 6-7).  
7 When the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window appears, you can  
select the appropriate scan options for the document or photograph to  
be scanned.  
After adjusting the settings in the Scan window, you can perform a  
preliminary preview scan of the image before performing a final scan.  
To launch a preview scan:  
a) Load the document to be scanned in the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
b) Click the Prescan button.  
The WorkCentre 385 scans the image and a preview appears in the  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window.  
6-4  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Level Adjustment  
The Level Adjustment dialog box shows the distribution of brightness  
levels in your image. To adjust the histogram plot, drag the triangles  
located below the horizontal bar to the desired values. The left (black)  
triangle changes the shadow levels. The right (white) triangle changes the  
highlight levels. The middle (gray) triangle controls the midtone levels.  
Level  
Adjustment  
tab  
Shadow  
control  
Highlight control  
Midtone (Gamma)  
control  
By varying the Shadow points and Highlight points you can change the  
relative shades and highlights of the image. The Shadow point represents  
the darkest value and the Highlight point is the brightest value.  
6
Overview  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Highlight scroll bar allows you to manually set a highlight level. The  
default for the Highlight settings is 255. You can increase or decrease the  
highlights in a particular image as needed by adjusting this scroll bar. The  
value in the adjacent box will change in the range 1 to 255 as the slider  
moves.  
Shadow  
The Shadow value represents the darkest value in an image. All pixels  
below this point will be rendered as pure black. If you subsequently broaden  
the shadow points on the Level Adjustment graph, the pixels will be re-  
mapped within the new range thus allowing you to see more detail in the  
image.  
The default value for Shadow is 0. You can increase or decrease the  
shadows in a particular image as needed by adjusting this scroll bar.  
Midtone  
All optical devices such as monitors and scanners have some differences in  
their light sensitivity characteristics. 385Scan provides Midtone adjustment  
for you to compensate for these differences in your scanner, and it produces  
better scanned images.  
6
Overview  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If you assign a name to the number, the name will appear in the  
display whenever you press the One-Touch button.  
4 Press the Enter button when the name appears correctly or without  
entering a name.  
To set another One-Touch number, press the desired One-Touch button  
and repeat steps 2 through this step.  
Or  
To return to Standby mode, press the Stop button.  
Using the One-Touch Address Label Sheet  
A One-Touch label sheet is included with your machine. As you store  
numbers in One-Touch dial buttons, make a note of the numbers on the  
label to remind you which number is stored in each position.  
3-16  
Sending a Fax  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEND FROM MEMORY - With this feature enabled, all transmission  
documents are automatically scanned into memory, and it will not be  
necessary to wait until documents in the Automatic Document Feeder  
(ADF) are sent out before you can send or store other fax jobs.  
1
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
LOCAL ID - Enabling this feature causes the machine to automatically  
print the page number, date, and time of the reception at the bottom of  
each page of a received document.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
PRIORITY TERM - You can set your machine to turn Print Priority off  
automatically if there is no further PC printing activity. There are two  
user selectable interval options; 8 hours or 30 minutes.  
Press 1 to select 8 hours. Print Priority is turned off automatically 8  
hours after PC printing is completed.  
Press 2 to select 30 minutes. Print Priority is turned off automatically  
30 minutes after PC printing is completed.  
Note: Refer to Print Priority on page 1-43 for details on the Print Priority  
feature.  
REPRINT - This feature allows you to turn the Last Fax Data Reprint  
memory storage feature on or off.  
Press 1 to turn this feature on.  
Press 2 to turn this feature off.  
System Setup  
1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper/Output Tab  
The Paper Output tab is shown below.  
Copies  
Click in the Copies box to enter a value (1 to 99), or click on one of the  
arrows to raise or lower the value in the Copies box.  
Paper Source  
Click on the down arrow to display the two Paper Source options, then  
click on the Paper tray or Manual feed option.  
Portrait/Landscape  
Click on one of the two radio buttons to select either Portrait or  
Landscape orientation for your print job.  
5-4  
Printing  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Size  
Click on the Down arrow to display the Paper Size options, then click on  
the desired paper size:  
Letter 8.5 x 11 in.  
Legal 8.5 x 14 in.  
Folio 8.5 x 13 in.  
B5 182 x 257 mm.  
10 4.125 x 9.5 in.  
Executive 7.25 x  
10.5 in.  
A4 210 x 297 mm.  
A5 148 x 210 mm.  
DL 110 x 220 mm.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Click in the Reduce/Enlarge box to enter a percent value (10 to 200), or  
click on one of the arrows to raise or lower the value in the Reduce/  
Enlarge box.  
Other Controls  
Each tab menu contains a row of buttons at the bottom of the window.  
These buttons are used as follows:  
Default All: Click on this button to change all printer settings to their  
default values.  
5
Defaults: Click on this button to change the currently selected printer  
settings to its default value.  
Help: Click on this button to display an on-line Help screen that  
provides more information about the printer settings.  
Printer Settings  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Image Quality Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Output Tab  
Note: If this tab is accessed through the Printers folder, any changes  
made to settings will become the default settings for the printer. Settings  
made when the printer properties are accessed through an application File  
menu and Print or Print Setup will remain active until the application you  
are printing from is closed.  
5
Printer Settings  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reduce/Enlarge  
This feature allows an image to be automatically enlarged or reduced as it is  
scanned. The default scaling factor is 100%. The selected scaling factor, the  
range of which is dependent on the selected image type, affects the printed  
scan output.  
Note: When scanning a printed image for screen display only, scale the  
image down to increase processing speed and decrease the file size.  
6
Overview  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Resolution  
The resolution setting determines the amount of information the scanner  
will capture in a scanned image.  
Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch). The higher the resolution is,  
the finer the image detail and the bigger the image file size is. Increasing  
the resolution will result in corresponding increases in image detail and  
image file size. See the examples of images at 75 and 300 dpi.  
6
300 dpi  
75 dpi  
Overview  
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the Midtone value, move the Slider to the left or right to change  
the values in the adjacent text box. The value in the adjacent box will  
change in the range 0.1 to 10.0 as the slider moves.  
Ordinarily, good results can be obtained from your machine by leaving the  
slider at its default value of 1.00.  
The Advanced Selection  
The Advanced selection will present features that allow you to modify the  
Level Adjustment and Tonal Map of the document.  
For both the Level Adjustment and the Tonal Map functions, the window  
displayed contains small representations, known as thumbnail views, of the  
original and enhanced images (Samples 1 and 2).  
To activate the Level Adjustment or Tonal Map functions, click on the  
Advanced... button at the bottom of the Image Quality tab.  
The Advanced... button  
When this button is selected, the Level Adjustment window is displayed by  
default.  
6-22  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Besides a default setting of No Descreen, the Descreen selector provides  
three grades of descreen preprocessing as described below.  
No Descreen  
No descreening.  
Art print (175 lpi)  
The Art print selection is used to smooth the fine dot pattern found in high  
quality art prints and magazines made in a resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Magazine (133 lpi)  
The Magazine selection is used to smooth the fine dot pattern found in  
glossy magazines made in the resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Newspaper (85 lpi)  
The Newspaper selection smooths the coarse grain pattern commonly found  
in newspaper images made in a resolution higher than 200dpi.  
Note: The preview display is not affected by the Descreen option. In order  
to see the results of Descreen process, it is always necessary to scan the  
image, and examine the output image on the workstation display.  
6-18  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: You can also change Height and Width values by directly adjusting  
the selection frame.  
Note: Output image file size is proportional to both Height and Width.  
If both Height and Width values are doubled, then the image area and  
image file size will increase four-fold.  
Note: Once you have confirmed or changed the size, resolution, and final  
scan boundary settings, the scanning software determines the size of the  
resulting scanned image and displays this information along with available  
hard disk space.  
Descreen  
This selection is used to eliminate moire patterns from the output image.  
Moire occurs as a result of differences in the screen pattern used to print the  
document and the scanner electronics. Moire may appear as checkered  
patterns bands or dots. Descreen preprocessing can minimize the transfer of  
moire patterns into your image file.  
6
Overview  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gray 256 Scales  
Halftone B/W  
Lineart B/W  
Gray 256 Scales  
Images scanned in Gray 256 Scales mode are scanned in 256 shades of gray.  
If high quality copies of photographs or other continuous tone originals are  
desired, Gray 256 Shades mode is the best choice.  
Gray 256 Scales provides accurate representation of black and white, and  
intermediate gray shades between black and white, for each individual  
pixel. It actually provides 256 shades, representing white by the value 255  
and black by the value zero, with progressively lighter intermediate shades  
of gray by values from 1 through 254.  
Halftone B/W  
This scan mode uses various combinations of black and white pixels to  
simulate gray scales. While not the same level of image quality as the Gray  
256 Scales image type, this image type is good for continuous tone images  
where smaller file size is more important than ideal image quality.  
In this scan mode, each pixel of the image has two possible states: on  
(black) or off (white). This means that each pixel can be represented by 1  
bit. For this reason, the file size is much smaller than that of a document  
scanned in the Gray 256 Scales mode, which uses 8 bits to define 256  
shades of gray.  
6
Overview  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Invert Image  
This function inverts all the tone values, providing a photographic negative  
of the original. This effect is similar to using the Tonal Map to tonally  
invert the image.  
6
Overview  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lineart B/W  
Lineart B/W mode is generally the best choice for printed text or pen-and-  
ink drawings.  
Like the Halftone B/W image type, this image type defines the state of each  
pixel in the image with one bit that is either on or off.  
For this reason, files created in this mode will require approximately the  
same amount of disk space as a Halftone B/W file.  
Note: In both Halftone and Lineart modes, the resolution can only be set at  
150, 200, or 300 dpi.  
6-12  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tonal Map  
If you select the Tonal Map tab, the following will be displayed.  
Tonal Map  
tab  
The Tonal Map is yet another way to adjust Highlight, Midtone, or Shadow  
levels in your images. When you open the Tonal Map dialog box, a tonal  
map consisting of a diagonally straight line appears. Notice that at every  
point on the default tonal map, the output shadow, midtone, and highlight  
brightness levels are equal to the input shadow, midtone, and highlight  
brightness levels.  
6-26  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8 Adjust the scan options as desired before initiating the final scan.  
9 Reload the document back into the Automatic Document Feeder.  
10 Click the Scan button.  
11 The document is scanned by the WorkCentre 385 and the updated  
image is displayed in the TWAIN compliant application.  
Starting the WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application from  
TextBridge Pro  
1 From the File menu, click on Select Scanner. A list of supported  
scanners will be displayed.  
2 From the list, select Xerox WorkCentre 385 (TWAIN). Click OK.  
3 From the TextBridge Pro Process menu, select Get Page. A Page Type  
dialog will be displayed.  
4 Select the desired page type and select Scanner as the Page Source.  
Click OK.  
5 The WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner application is displayed. Select  
the appropriate scan options for the document or photograph to be  
scanned.  
After adjusting the settings in the Scan window, you can perform a  
preliminary preview scan of the image before performing a final scan.  
To launch a preview scan:  
a) Load the document to be scanned in the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
6
b) Click the Prescan button.  
The WorkCentre 385 scans the image and a preview appears in the  
WorkCentre 385 TWAIN Scanner window.  
Overview  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4 To move the selection frame to a different area of the image without  
changing its size or shape, place the cursor within the selection frame  
and drag it to the desired location.  
5 To create an entirely new selection frame, place the cursor outside the  
existing selection frame and drag diagonally. The first selection frame  
will disappear while the second one remains.  
Note: If you hold down the Shift key and drag the mouse diagonally, the  
sides of the selection frame will resize proportionally.  
Zoom In and Out Tools  
The Zoom In and Out tools allow you to zoom in or out on an image within  
the Preview window; zooming in (the + sign appears on the zoom cursor)  
enlarges the view of the active image so that you can work on small details  
in an image. Zooming out (the - sign appears on the zoom cursor) reduces  
the view of the active image.  
To use the Zoom In tool:  
1 Select the Zoom tool by clicking the Zoom In tool icon.  
2 Drag the cursor to the preview area. The cursor will change to a  
magnifying glass whenever it is in the preview space.  
6-36  
Scanning  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes Troubleshooting for the following areas:  
Clearing Jams  
LCD Display Error Messages  
Fax Problems  
Printer Problems  
Print Quality Problems  
Refer to the specific subsection for a description of the problem and  
associated solutions.  
7
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 

West Bend Slow Cooker 3 4 Quart Crockery Cooker User Manual
Western Digital Computer Drive WDE2170 User Manual
Westinghouse Flat Panel Television LTV 46w1 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer 326035915 User Manual
Whirlpool Washer Dryer LTG6234D User Manual
Whynter Freezer fm 45g User Manual
WTB Switch CO1 0508 1 User Manual
Xantech Universal Remote YiAK K1000 01A User Manual
Yamaha Portable Generator EF4000DE User Manual
Zanussi Gas Grill 178094 User Manual